Home

SMC EliteConnect Wireless Bridge

1. Sensitivity Table C 1 Sensitivity 802 11a IEEE 802 11a Sensitivity GHz dBm Modulation Rates 5 15 5 250 5 25 5 350 5 50 5 700 5 725 5 825 BPSK 6 Mbps 89 89 91 90 BPSK 9 Mbps 89 89 89 88 QPSK 12 Mbps 88 87 87 87 QPSK 18 Mbps 85 85 85 84 16 QAM 24 Mbps 81 81 83 80 16 QAM 36 Mbps 78 78 79 77 64 QAM 48 Mbps 73 73 74 71 64QAM 54 Mbps 71 71 12 67 Table C 2 Sensitivity 802 11g Data Rate Sensitivity dBm 6 Mbps 91 9 Mbps 90 12 Mbps 89 17 Mbps 88 24 Mbps 84 36 Mbps 80 48 Mbps 75 54 Mbps 73 Table C 3 Sensitivity 802 11b Data Rate Sensitivity dBm 1 Mbps 96 2 Mbps 93 5 5 Mbps 93 11 Mbps 90 C 4 Transmit Power Table C 4 Transmit Power 802 11a IEEE 802 11a Maximum Output Power GHz dBm Data Rate 5 15 5 250 5 25 5 350 5 50 5 700 5 725 5 825 6 Mbps 18 18 18 18 9 Mbps 18 18 18 17 12 Mbps 18 18 18 17 8 Mbps 18 18 18 17 24 Mbps 18 18 18 17 36 Mbps 18 18 18 17 48 Mbps 17 5 17 17 16 5 54 Mbps 17 5 17 16 5 15 Table C 5 Transmit Power 802 11g IEEE 802 119 Maximum Output Power GHz dBm Data Rate 2 412 2 417 2 467 2 472 6 Mbps 20 20 20 9 Mbps 20 20 20 12 Mbps 20 20 20 18 Mbps 20 20 20 24 Mbps 20 20 20 36 Mbps 19 19 18 5 48 Mbps 19 19 18 5 54 Mbps 18 18 18 Ta
2. 128 eee Spanning Tree Protocol STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops 6 23 6 System Configuration Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology Bridge Enables disables STP on the wireless bridge or repeater Default Disabled Bridge Priority Used in selecting the root d
3. See External Antenna Options on page 1 5 for a list of the available antenna options and their part numbers The optional external antennas if any that are certified for use with the access point are listed by typing antenna control id Selecting the correct antenna ID ensures that the access point s radio transmissions are within regulatory power limits for the country of operation The antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options e If there is no integrated antenna on the unit for the wireless interface the default setting is indicated as id 0x0000 module NA Example SMC AP if wireless g antenna id id 0x0000 module NA id 0x0106 module ACC04 050090 Directional Panel Ant id 0x0107 module ACC04 05028A Omni Directional Ant id 0x0108 module ACC04 05427A Omni Directional Ant id 0x0109 module ACC04 053830 0 Degree Sector Ant SMC AP if wireless g antenna id 0000 SMC AP if wireless g antenna location This command selects the antenna mounting location for the radio interface Syntax antenna location lt indoor outdoor gt indoor The antenna is mounted indoors outdoor The antenna is mounted outdoors Default Setting Indoor Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage Selecting the correct location ensures that the access point only uses radio channels that are permitte
4. Ad Hoc A group of computers connected as an independent wireless network without an access point Advanced Encryption Standard AES An encryption algorithm that implements symmetric key cryptography AES provides very strong encryption using a completely different ciphering algorithm to TKIP and WEP Authentication The process to verify the identity of a client requesting network access IEEE 802 11 specifies two forms of authentication open system and shared key Backbone The core infrastructure of a network The portion of the network that transports information from one central location to another central location where it is unloaded onto a local system Basic Service Set BSS A set of 802 11 compliant stations and an access point that operate as a fully connected wireless network Beacon A signal periodically transmitted from the access point that is used to identify the service set and to maintain contact with wireless clients Glossary 1 Glossary Broadcast Key Broadcast keys are sent to stations using 802 1X dynamic keying Dynamic broadcast key rotation is often used to allow the access point to generate a random group key and periodically update all key management capable wireless clients CSMA CA Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is
5. Enabled Logging Console State Enabled Logging Level Alert Logging Facility Type 16 Servers 1 192 168 2 29 UDP Port 514 State Enabled 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled SMC AP CLI Commands for Displaying Event Logs To view the access point log entries use the show event log command from the Exec mode To clear all log entries from the access point use the logging clear command from the Global Configuration mode Enterprise AP show event log 7 34 Mar 09 11 57 55 Information 802 11g 11g Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 11 57 55 Information 802 11g Radio channel updated to 8 Mar 09 11 57 34 Information 802 11g 11g Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 11 57 18 Information 802 11g 11g Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 11 56 35 Information 802 1la 1lla Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 11 55 52 Information SSH task Set SSH server port to 22 Mar 09 11 55 52 Information SSH task Enable SSH server Mar 09 11 55 52 Information Enable Telnet Mar 09 11 55 40 Information 802 11la 1la Radio Interface Disabled Mar 09 11 55 40 Information 802 1la Transmit Power set to QUARTER Press lt n gt next lt p gt previous lt a gt abort lt y gt continue to end SMC AP configure Enter configuration commands one per line End with CTRL Z SMC AP config logging clear 7 33 Enterprise AP 6 94 Status Information
6. None O 64 Bit O 126 Bit O 152 Bt None e Key Type Select the preferred method of entering WEP encryption keys on the access point and enter up to four keys e Hexadecimal Enter keys as 10 hexadecimal digits 0 9 and A F for 64 bit keys 26 hexadecimal digits for 128 bit keys or 32 hexadecimal digits for 152 bit keys 802 11a radio only This is the default setting e Alphanumeric Enter keys as 5 alphanumeric characters for 64 bit keys 13 alphanumeric characters for 128 bit keys or 16 alphanumeric characters for 152 bit keys 802 11a radio only Key Number Selects the key number to use for encryption for each VAP interface If the clients have all four keys configured to the same values you can change the encryption key to any of the four settings without having to update the client keys Default Key 1 Shared Key Setup Select 64 Bit 128 Bit or 152 Bit key length Note that the same size of encryption key must be supported on all wireless clients Default None Note Key index and type must match that configured on the clients Note In a mixed mode environment with clients using static WEP keys and WPA select WEP transmit key index 2 3 or 4 The access point uses transmit key index 1 for the generation of dynamic keys 6 76 Radio Interface 6 To enable WEP shared keys for a VAP interface click Security under Radio A or Radio G Then select the VAP interface that will use WEP keys by clicking M
7. Check that you have a valid network connection to the access point and that the Ethernet port or the wireless interface that you are using has not been disabled e If you are connecting to the access point through the wired Ethernet interface check the network cabling between the management station and the access point If you are connecting to access point from a wireless client ensure that you have a valid connection to the access point If you cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions permitted i e four sessions Try connecting again at a later time A 1 A Troubleshooting 3 If you cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection e Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and 9600 bps e Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided on page B 3 4 If you forgot or lost the password e Contact your dealer for help 5 Ifall other recovery measure fail and the access point is still not functioning properly take any of these steps e Reset the access point s hardware using the console interface web interface or through a power reset A 2 Appendix B Cables and Pinouts Twisted Pair Cable Assignments For 10 100BASE TX connections a twisted pair cable must have two pairs of wires Each wire pair is identified by
8. IP address of the host Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached The following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging Example SMC AP ping 10 1 0 19 192 168 2 29 is alive SMC AP 7 9 7 Command Line Interface reset This command restarts the system or restores the factory default settings Syntax reset lt board configuration gt board Reboots the system configuration Resets the configuration settings to the factory defaults and then reboots the system Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test Example This example shows how to reset the system SMC AP reset board Reboot system now lt y n gt y show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage e The history buffer size is fixed at 10 c
9. Syntax address filter entry lt mac address gt lt allowed denied gt mac address Physical address of client Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens e g 00 90 D1 12 AB 89 allowed Entry is allowed access denied Entry is denied access Default None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Mode The access point supports up to 1024 MAC addresses An entry in the address table may be allowed or denied access depending on the global setting configured for the address entry default command Example SMC AP config address filter entry 00 70 50 cc 99 la allowed SMC AP config Related Commands address filter default 7 71 802 1x supplicant user 7 69 address filter delete This command deletes a MAC address from the filter table Syntax address filter delete lt mac address gt mac address Physical address of client Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens Default None 7 72 MAC Address Authentication 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config address filter delete 00 70 50 cc 99 1b SMC AP config Related Commands 802 1x supplicant user 7 69 mac authentication server This command sets address filtering to be performed with local or remote options Use the no form to disable MAC address authentication Syntax mac authentication server local remote local Authenticate the
10. The following example shows how to display all file information SMC AP dir File Name Type File Size dflt img bin 2 1044140 syscfg 5 16860 syscfg_bak 5 16860 zz img bin 2 1044140 1048576 byte s available SMC AP show bootfile This command displays the name of the current operation code file that booted the system Syntax show snmp filter assignments Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show bootfile Bootfile Information Bootfile ec img bin SMC AP 7 59 7 Command Line Interface RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access for RADIUS aware devices to the network An authentication server contains a database of credentials such as users names and passwords for each wireless client that requires access to the access point Table 7 11 RADIUS Client Command Function Mode Page radius server address Specifies the RADIUS server GC 7 60 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 7 61 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 7 61 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 7 62 radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication GC 7 62 requests radius server Sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port GC 7 63 port accounting radius server Sets the
11. USER GUIDE SMC2891W AG Universal 2 4GHz 5GHz Wireless Dual Band Outdoor Access Point EliteConnect SMC2890W AG and The easy way to make all your network connections SMC Networks 20 Mason February 2007 Irvine CA 92618 Revision Number R01 Phone 949 679 8000 F1 0 0 1 Copyright Information furnished by SMC Networks Inc SMC is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by SMC for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of SMC SMC reserves the right to change specifications at any time without notice Copyright 2005 by SMC Networks Inc 20 Mason Irvine CA 92618 All rights reserved Trademarks SMC is a registered trademark and EliteConnect is a trademark of SMC Networks Inc Other product and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Compliances Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with
12. max association 32 7 110 SMC AP if wireless a VAP 0 pmksa lifetime 900 7 128 Enterprise AP if wireless a VAP 0 Configuring Rogue AP Detection To configure Rouge AP detection select the Radio Settings page and scroll down to the Rouge AP section Common Rogue AP AP Detection Disable Enable AP Scan Interval 5 0 10080 min 720 minute Petree posh 360 miliseconds SeanAPNow C Disable O Enable Rogue AP A rogue AP is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration Rogue APs can allow unauthorized access to the network or fool client stations into mistakenly associating with them and thereby blocking access to network resources The access point can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other access points within range A database of nearby access points is maintained where any rogue APs can be identified During a scan Syslog messages see Enabling System Logging on page 6 33 are sent for each access point detected Rogue access points can be identified by unknown BSSID MAC address or SSID configuration 6 55 6 System Configuration AP Detection Enables the periodic scanning for other access points Default Disable AP Scan Interval Sets the time between each rogue AP scan Range 30 10080 minutes Default 720
13. status Enabled state Forwarding priority 0 path cost 19 message age Timer Inactive message age 4346 designated root priority 32768 MAC 00 30 F1 F0 9A 9C designated cost 3 0 designated bridge priority 32768 MAC 00 30 F1 F0 9A 9C designated port priority 0 port No 1 forward transitions 1 SMC AP 7 84 Spanning Tree Commands 7 Spanning Tree Commands The commands described in this section are used to set the MAC address table aging time and spanning tree parameters for both the Ethernet and wireless interfaces Table 7 15 Bridge Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge stp enable Enables the Spanning Tree feature GC 7 85 bridge stp forwarding delay Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 7 86 bridge stp hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 7 86 bridge stp max age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 7 87 bridge link path cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of a port IC 7 88 bridge link port priority Configures the spanning tree priority of a port IC 7 88 show bridge stp Displays the global spanning tree settings Exec 7 89 show bridge link Displays current bridge settings for specified interfaces Exec 7 83 bridge stp enable This command enables the Spanning Tree Protocol Use the no form to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol Syntax bridge stp enable no bridge stp enable
14. 1_E ro DEC E 5 E Enabling System Logging The access point supports a logging process that can control error messages saved to memory or sent to a Syslog server The logged messages serve as a valuable tool for isolating access point and network problems System Log Setup Enables the logging of error messages Default Disable Server 1 4 Enables the sending of log messages to a Syslog server host Up to four Syslog servers are supported on the access point Default Disable Server Name IP The IP address or name of a Syslog server Default 0 0 0 0 UDP Port The UDP port used by a Syslog server Range 514 or 11024 65535 Default 514 Logging Console Enables the logging of error messages to the console Default Disable 6 33 6 System Configuration Logging Level Sets the minimum severity level for event logging Default Informational The system allows you to limit the messages that are logged by specifying a minimum severity level The following table lists the error message levels from the most severe Emergency to least severe Debug The message levels that are logged include the specified minimum level up to the Emergency level Error Level Description Emergency System unusable Alerts Immediate action needed Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted Error Error conditions e g invalid inpu
15. 802 119 on page 6 68 After you have configured the radio settings select Security under Radio A or Radio G set an SSID to identify the wireless network service provided by each VAP you want to use and then click Apply to save your settings Before enabling the radio service for any VAP first configure the WEP WPA and 802 1X security settings described in the following sections After you have finished configuring the security settings return to the main Security page shown below start the required VAP interfaces by clicking the Enable checkbox and then click Apply Sea 802 119 Security Before enabling the radios you must set the country selection via the CLI SMC_VAP_11G0 en SMC_VAP_11G1 Peek Enable Enables radio communications on the VAP interface Default Disabled Note You must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable other VAP interfaces SSID The name of the basic service set provided by a VAP interface Clients that want to connect to the network through the access point must set their SSID to the same as that of an access point VAP interface Default SMC_VAP_11A 0 3 Range 1 32 characters Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WEP provides a basic level of security preventing unauthorized access to the network and encrypting data transmitted between wireless clients and the access point WEP uses static shared keys fixed length hexadecimal or alphanumeric strings that ar
16. Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 max association 32 SMC AP if wireless g 7 110 Wireless Interface Commands 7 assoc timeout interval This command configures the idle time interval when no frames are sent after which the client is disassociated from the VAP interface Syntax assoc timeout interval lt minutes gt minutes The number of minutes of inactivity before disassociation Range 5 60 Default Setting 30 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP O association timeout interval 20 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 auth timeout value This command configures the time interval within which clients must complete authentication to the VAP interface Syntax auth timeout value lt minutes gt minutes The number of minutes before re authentication Range 5 60 Default Setting 60 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 auth timeout value 40 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 shutdown This command disables the wireless interface Use the no form to restart the interface Syntax shutdown no shutdown 7 111 7 Command Line Interface Default Setting Interface enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage You must first enable VAP interface 0 before you can enable VAP
17. Enterprise AP if wireless a multicast data rate 6 7 99 SMC AP if wireless a fragmentation length 512 7 106 SMC AP if wireless a rts threshold 256 7 107 SMC AP if wireless a Configuring Wi Fi Multimedia Wireless networks offer an equal opportunity for all devices to transmit data from any type of application Although this is acceptable for most applications multimedia applications with audio and video are particularly sensitive to the delay and throughput variations that result from this equal opportunity wireless access method For multimedia applications to run well over a wireless network a Quality of Service QoS mechanism is required to prioritize traffic types and provide an enhanced opportunity wireless access method The access point implements QoS using the Wi Fi Multimedia WMM standard Using WMM the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same time WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the developing IEEE 802 11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to inter operate with both WMM enabled clients and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality Access Categories WMM defines four access categories ACs voice video best effort and background These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802 1D priority tags see Table 6 1 The direct m
18. Example This sets daylight savings time to be used from July 1st to September 1st SMC AP config sntp server daylight saving Enter Daylight saving from which month lt 1 12 gt 6 and which day lt 1 31 gt 1 Enter Daylight saving end to which month lt 1 12 gt 9 and which day lt 1 31 gt 1 SMC AP config sntp server timezone This command sets the time zone for the access point s internal clock Syntax sntp server timezone lt hours gt hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 12 to 12 hours Default Setting 5 BOGOTA EASTERN INDIANA Command Mode Global Configuration 7 37 7 Command Line Interface Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example SMC AP config sntp server timezone 8 SMC AP config show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show sntp SNTP Information Service State SNTP server 1 IP SNTP server 2 IP Current Time Time Zone Daylight Saving SMC AP Enabled 8 TAIPEI Enabled from Jun 137 92 140 80
19. HTTPS connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management settings Syntax APmgmtUI lt SNMP Telnet Web enable disable gt SNMP Specifies SNMP management access Telnet Specifies Telnet management access Web Specifies web based management access enable disable Enables or disables the selected management access method Default Setting All enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses SMC AP config apmgmtui SNMP enable SMC AP config show apmanagement This command shows the AP management configuration including the IP addresses of management stations allowed to access the access point as well as the interface protocols which are open to management access 7 22 Command Mode Exec Example System Management Commands 7 SMC AP show apmanagement Management AP Information AP Management IP Mode Any IP Telnet UI Enable WEB UI Enable SNMP UI Enable SMC AP 7 23 7 Command Line Interface show system This command displays basic system configuration settings Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show system System Information System Location System Contact System Country Code MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway VLAN State IAPP State DHCP Client HTTP Server HTIP Server Port HTIPS Server HTIPS Server Port Slot S
20. SMC AP if wireless g channel 1 SMC AP if wireless g transmit power This command adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted from the access point Syntax transmit power lt signal strength gt signal strength Signal strength transmitted from the access point Options full half quarter eighth min 7 100 Wireless Interface Commands 7 Default Setting full Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage e The min keyword indicates minimum power The longer the transmission distance the higher the transmission power required But to support the maximum number of users in an area you must keep the power as low as possible Power selection is not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum supported clients You also have to ensure that high strength signals do not interfere with the operation of other radio devices in your area Example SMC AP if wireless g transmit power half SMC AP if wireless g radio mode This command forces the operating mode for the 802 11g wireless interface Syntax radio mode lt b g b g gt b b only mode Both 802 11b and 802 11g clients can communicate with the access point but 802 11g clients can only transfer data at 802 11b standard rates up to 11 Mbps e g g only mode Only 802 11g clients can communicate with the access point up to 54 Mbps b g b amp g mixed mode Both 802 11b and 802 11g clients can
21. The IP address of an SNTP or NTP time server that the access point attempts to poll for a time update Secondary Server The IP address of a secondary SNTP or NTP time server The access point first attempts to update the time from the primary server if this fails it attempts an update from the secondary server 6 35 6 System Configuration Note The access point also allows you to disable SNTP and set the system clock manually Set Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours your time zone is located before east or after west UTC Enable Daylight Saving The access point provides a way to automatically adjust the system clock for Daylight Savings Time changes To use this feature you must define the month and date to begin and to end the change from standard time During this period the system clock is set back by one hour CLI Commands for SNTP To enable SNTP support on the access point from the global configuration mode specify SNTP server IP addresses using the sntp server ip command then use the sntp server enable command to enable the service Use the sntp server timezone command to set the time zone for your location and the sntp server daylight saving command to set daylight savings To view the cur
22. The standard provides for data rates of 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps IEEE 802 119 A wireless standard that supports wireless communications in the 2 4 GHz band using using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM The standard provides for data rates of 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps IEEE 802 11g is also backward compatible with IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication Infrastructure An integrated wireless and wired LAN is called an infrastructure configuration Inter Access Point Protocol IAPP A protocol that specifies the wireless signaling required to ensure the successful handover of wireless clients roaming between different 802 11f compliant access points Local Area Network LAN A group of interconnected computer and support devices MAC Address The physical layer address used to uniquely identify network nodes Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Open System A security option which broadcasts a beacon signal including the access point s configured SSID Wireless clients can read the SSID from the beacon and automatically reset their SSID to allow imme
23. Transmit Power Data Rate Fragmentation Threshold RTS Threshold Beacon Interval DTIM Interval Maximum Association Native VLAN ID Closed System Multicast cipher Unicast cipher WPA clients WPA Key Mgmt Mode WPA PSK Key Type Encryption Default Transmit Key Static Keys Authentication Type Rogue AP Detection Rogue AP Scan Interval Rogue AP Scan Duration databits 8 parity none speed 9600 stop bits 1 EMPTY Key 1 EMPTY Key 2 Key Length Key 1 ZERO Key 2 ZERO Key 3 ZERO IP Address 192 168 0 151 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 1 Primary DNS 210 200 211 225 Secondary DNS 210 200 211 193 Speed duplex 100Base TX Full Duplex Admin status Up Operational status Up Enterprise 802 1la Access Point VAP_TEST_11A 0 0 AUTO Disable 100 5 dBm 54Mbps 2346 bytes 2347 bytes 100 TUs 1 beacon 64 stations DISABLED WEP TKIP and AES REQUIRED PRE SHARED KEY ALPHANUMERIC DISABLED aL Key 3 EMPTY Key 4 EMPTY Key 4 ZERO OPEN Disabled 720 minutes 350 milliseconds 7 26 System Management Commands 7 Logging Information Syslog State Disabled Logging Console State Disabled Logging Level Informational Logging Facility Type 16 Servers deg 203 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 20 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled IP 0 050
24. Use this command to configure the spanning tree priority globally for the wireless bridge Use the no form to restore the default Syntax bridge stp priority lt priority gt no bridge stp priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 7 87 7 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example SMC AP config bridge stp bridge priority 40000 SMC AP config bridge link path cost Use this command to configure the spanning tree path cost for the specified port Syntax bridge link path cost lt index gt lt cost gt index Specifies the bridge link number on the wireless bridge Range 1 6 required on wireless interface only cost The path cost for the port Range 1 65535 Default Setting 19 Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Protocol to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over port priority Example SMC AP if wireless a b
25. WEP is implemented in this device to prevent unauthorized access to your wireless network For more secure data transmissions enable encryption with this command and set at least one static WEP key with the key command The WEP settings must be the same on each client in your wireless network Note that WEP protects data transmitted between wireless nodes but does not protect any transmissions over your wired network or over the Internet You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption WEP TKIP and AES CCMP in the access point Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 encryption SMC AP if wireless g Related Commands key 7 124 7 123 7 Command Line Interface key This command sets the keys used for WEP encryption Use the no form to delete a configured key Syntax key lt index gt lt size gt lt type gt lt value gt no key index index Key index Range 1 4 size Key size Options 64 128 or 152 bits type Input format Options ASCII HEX e value The key string For 64 bit keys use 5 alphanumeric characters or 10 hexadecimal digits For 128 bit keys use 13 alphanumeric characters or 26 hexadecimal digits For 152 bit keys use 16 alphanumeric characters or 32 hexadecimal digits Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage To enable Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP use the auth shared
26. and domain 6 4 name servers RADIUS Configures the RADIUS server for wireless client authentication 6 7 and accounting SSH Settings Configures Secure Shell management access 6 11 Authentication Configures 802 1X client authentication with an option for MAC 6 12 address authentication Filter Control Filters communications between wireless clients access to the 6 17 management interface from wireless clients and traffic matching specific Ethernet protocol types VLAN Enables VLAN support and sets the management VLAN ID 6 19 WDS Settings Configures bridge or repeater modes for each radio interface and 6 21 sets spanning tree parameters AP Management Configures access to management interfaces 6 27 Administration Configures user name and password for management access 6 28 upgrades software from local file FTP or TFTP server resets configuration settings to factory defaults and resets the access point System Log Controls logging of error messages sets the system clock via 6 33 SNTP server or manual configuration RSSI Configures RSSI value display bridge link distance and LED 6 37 display mode SNMP Configures SNMP settings 6 40 SNMP Controls access to this access point from management stations 6 40 using SNMP as well as the hosts that will receive trap messages SNMP Trap Filters Defines trap filters for SNMP v3 users 6 48 SNMP Targets Specifies SNMPv3 users that will receive trap messages 6 50 Radio Interface A Configures the IEEE 802 11a inter
27. communicate with the access point up to 54 Mbps Default Setting b g mode Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless 802 119 Command Usage e For Japan only 13 channels are available when set to g or b g modes When set to b mode 14 channels are available Both the 802 119 and 802 11b standards operate within the 2 4 GHz band If you are operating in g mode any 802 11b devices in the service area will contribute to the radio frequency noise and affect network performance 7 101 7 Command Line Interface Example SMC AP if wireless g radio mode g SMC AP if wireless g preamble This command sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a 802 11b g data transmission Syntax preamble long short or long long Sets the preamble to long 192 microseconds short or long Sets the preamble to short if no 802 11b clients are detected 96 microseconds Default Setting Short or Long Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless 802 11b g Command Usage Using a short preamble instead of a long preamble can increase data throughput on the access point but requires that all clients can support a short preamble Set the preamble to long to ensure the access point can support all 802 11b and 802 119 clients Example SMC AP if wireless g preamble short SMC AP if wireless g 7 102 Wireless Interface Commands 7 antenna control This c
28. in the wireless network The root bridge is the unit connected to the main core of the wired LAN Other bridges need to specify one Parent link to the root bridge or to a bridge connected to the root bridge The other seven WDS links are available as Child links to other bridges e The bridge link on the radio interface always uses the default VAP interface In any bridge mode VAP interfaces 1 to 7 are not available for use Example SMC AP if wireless a bridge role root bridge SMC AP if wireless a bridge channel auto sync This command allows a child bridge to automatically find the operating channel of its parent bridge Caution Do not enable Channel Auto Sync on a master bridge if there is no root bridge acting as the master bridge s parent Syntax bridge channel auto sync lt enable disable gt enable The bridge will automatically search and find the operating channel of its parent disable The bridge must have the operating channel manually set to the operating channel of its parent bridge Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Example SMC AP if wireless a bridge channel auto sync enable Enable channel auto sync SMC AP if wireless a bridge link parent This command configures the MAC address of the parent bridge node Syntax bridge link parent lt mac address gt mac address The wireless MAC address of the parent bridge uni
29. interface ethernet dns server ip address ip dhcp speed duplex shutdown show interface ethernet Wireless Interface Commands interface wireless vap speed turbo multicast data rate channel transmit power radio mode preamble antenna control antenna id antenna location beacon interval dtim period fragmentation length rts threshold super a super g description ssid closed system max association assoc timeout interval auth timeout value shutdown 7 83 7 83 7 85 7 85 7 86 7 86 7 87 7 87 7 88 7 88 7 89 7 90 7 90 7 91 7 91 7 92 7 93 7 94 7 94 7 95 7 97 7 97 7 98 7 98 7 99 7 100 7 100 7 101 7 102 7 103 7 103 7 104 7 105 7 105 7 106 7 107 7 108 7 108 7 109 7 109 7 110 7 110 7 111 7 111 7 111 Contents show interface wireless 7 113 show station 7 115 Rogue AP Detection Commands 7 116 rogue ap enable 7 116 rogue ap authenticate 7 117 rogue ap duration 7 118 rogue ap interval 7 118 rogue ap scan 7 119 show rogue ap 7 120 Wireless Security Commands 7 120 auth 7 121 encryption 7 123 key 7 124 transmit key 7 125 cipher suite 7 126 mic_mode 7 127 wpa pre shared key 7 128 pmksa lifetime 7 128 pre authentication 7 129 Link Integrity Commands 7 130 link integrity ping detect 7 131 link integrity ping host 7 131 link integrity ping interval 7 132 link integrity ping fail retry 7 132 link integrity ethernet detect 7 132 show link integrity 7 133 IAPP Commands 7
30. viii Danemark Dieser Stromstecker mu die ebene 107 2 D1 der standard DK2 1a oder DK2 5a Bestimmungen einhalten Schweiz Dieser Stromstecker mu die SEV ASE 1011Bestimmungen einhalten Europe Das Netzkabel mu vom Typ HO3VVF3GO 75 Mindestanforderung sein und die Aufschrift lt HAR gt oder lt BASEC gt tragen Der Netzstecker mu die Norm CEE 7 7 erf llen SCHUKO Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Radio Characteristics Package Checklist Hardware Description LED Indicators Integrated High Gain Antenna External Antenna Options Ethernet Port Power Injector Module Grounding Point Water Tight Test Point Wall and Pole Mounting Bracket Kit System Configuration Features and Benefits Chapter 2 Network Configuration Access Point Topologies Infrastructure Wireless LAN Infrastructure Wireless LAN for Roaming Wireless PCs Bridge Link Topologies Point to Point Configuration Point to Multipoint Configuration Chapter 3 Bridge Link Planning Data Rates Radio Path Planning Antenna Height Antenna Position and Orientation Radio Interference Weather Conditions Ethernet Cabling Grounding Chapier 4 Hardware Installation Testing Basic Link Operation Mount the Unit 1 _ a a a a a a ek ET ATS 1 oO ONNSNSODOCTOT ODD gt mmm P _ ine NENA ar ROD Contents Mounting to a Wall Connect External Antennas Connect Cables to the Unit Connect the Power I
31. 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message 7 86 Spanning Tree Commands 7 Example SMC AP config bridge stp hello time 5 SMC AP config bridge stp max age Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for the wireless bridge Use the no form to restore the default Syntax bridge stp max age lt seconds gt no bridge stp max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example SMC AP config bridge stp max age 40 SMC AP config bridge stp priority
32. 10th subtree ID When there are more subtree IDs than bits in the mask the mask is padded with ones Example SMC AP config snmp server filter trapfilter include 1 SMC AP config snmp server filter trapfilter exclude a E E TE Er E a S E 7 50 SNMP Commands 7 snmp server filter assignments This command assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets Use the no form to remove an SNMP v3 filter assignment Syntax snmp server filter assignments lt target id gt lt filter id gt no snmp server filter assignments lt target id gt e target id A user defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP notifications Maximum length 32 characters filter id A user defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter Maximum length 32 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config snmp server filter assignments mytraps trapfilter SMC AP config exit SMC AP show snmp target Host ID mytraps User chris IP Address 1925168 1 33 UDP Port 162 SMC AP show snmp filter assignments HostID FilterID mytraps trapfilter SMC AP config show snmp groups This command displays the SNMP v3 pre defined groups Syntax show snmp groups Command Mode Exec 7 51 7 Command Line Interface Example GroupName RO SecurityModel USM SecurityLevel NoAuthNoPriv GroupName RWAuth SecurityModel USM SecurityLevel AuthNoPri
33. 134 iapp 7 134 VLAN Commands 7 135 vlan 7 135 management vlanid 7 136 vlan id 7 136 WMM Commands 7 137 wmm 7 138 wmm acknowledge policy 7 138 wmmparam 7 139 Appendix A Troubleshooting A 1 Appendix B Cables and Pinouts B 1 Twisted Pair Cable Assignments B 1 10 100BASE TX Pin Assignments B 1 Straight Through Wiring B 2 XV Contents Crossover Wiring 8 Pin DIN Connector Pinout 8 Pin DIN to RJ 45 Cable Wiring Appendix C Specifications General Specifications Sensitivity Transmit Power Appendix D Montieren der Bridge Verwenden der Halterung f r Mastmontage Verwenden der Halterung f r Wandmontage Anschlie en der externen Antennen Anschlie en der Kabel an das Ger t Anschlie en des PoE Injectors Glossary Index xvi B 3 B 3 B 4 C 1 C 1 C 5 D 1 D 1 D 5 D 6 Chapter 1 Introduction The Dual band Outdoor Access Point Bridge system consists of two models that provide point to point or point to multipoint bridge links between remote Ethernet LANs and wireless access point services for clients in the local LAN area e SMC2891W AG Includes an integrated high gain antenna for the 802 11a radio and is designed to operate as a bridge node in point to multipoint configurations or provide a high speed point to point wireless link between two sites that can be up to 15 4 km 9 6 miles apart The 802 11b g radio requires an external antenna option e SMC2890W AG Provides only externa
34. 19 Wireless Security Commands 7 120 Command Function Mode Page auth Defines the 802 11 authentication type allowed by the IC W VAP 7 124 access point encryption Defines whether or not WEP encryption is used to IC W VAP 7 123 provide privacy for wireless communications key Sets the keys used for WEP encryption IC W 7 124 transmit key Sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting IC W VAP 7 125 data frames sent between the access point and wireless clients cipher suite Selects an encryption method for the global key used IC W VAP 7 126 for multicast and broadcast traffic mic_mode Specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity IC W 7 127 Check MIC wpa pre shared key Defines a WPA preshared key value IC W VAP 7 128 Wireless Security Commands 7 Table 7 19 Wireless Security Commands Command Function Mode Page pmksa lifetime Sets the lifetime PMK security associations IC W VAP 7 128 pre authentication Enables WPA2 pre authentication for fast roaming IC W VAP 7 129 auth This command configures authentication for the VAP interface Syntax auth lt open system shared key wpa wpa psk wpa2 wpa2 psk wpa wpa2 mixed wpa wpa2 psk mixed gt lt required supported gt open system Accepts the client without verifying its identity using a shared key Open authentication means either there is no encryption if encryption is disabled
35. 192 43 244 18 08 04 Jun 20th 2003 BEIJING 1st to Sep 7 38 DHCP Relay Commands 7 DHCP Relay Commands Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP can dynamically allocate an IP address and other configuration information to network clients that broadcast a request To receive the broadcast request the DHCP server would normally have to be on the same subnet as the client However when the access point s DHCP relay agent is enabled received client requests can be forwarded directly by the access point to aknown DHCP server on another subnet Responses from the DHCP server are returned to the access point which then broadcasts them back to clients Table 7 8 DHCP Relay Commands Command Function Mode Page dhcp relay enable Enables the DHCP relay agent GC 7 39 dhcp relay Sets the primary and secondary DHCP server GC 7 40 address show dhcp relay Shows current DHCP relay configuration settings Exec 7 40 dhcp relay enable This command enables the access points DHCP relay agent Use the no form to disable the agent Syntax no dhcp relay enable Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage For the DHCP relay agent to function the primary DHCP server must be configured using the dhep relay primary command A secondary DHCP server does not need to be configured but it is recommended If there is no response from the primary DHCP server and a seconda
36. 192 43 244 18 Current Time 00 14 Jan 1st 1970 Time Zone 5 BOGOTA EASTERN INDIANA Daylight Saving Disabled 0 hours 16 minutes 51 seconds se Wireless AP COUNTRY_SET Subnet Mask Default Gateway VLAN State IAPP State DHCP Client HTTP Server HTTP Server Port HTTPS Server HTTPS Server Port Slot Status Boot Rom Version Software Version 7 28 Management VLAN ID AP 00 12 CF 05 B7 84 No 802 11g Channel Stations System Information Serial Number System Up time 0 days System Name Enterpri System Location System Contact Contact System Country Code 99 NO MAC Address IP Address 192 168 0 151 259 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 DISABLED 1 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED 80 ENABLED 443 Dual band a g v3 0 7 v4 3 2 2 Enab Enab Enab Enab Enab Enab Enab Enab Enab Enab Enab led ed led led led led led led led led led System Logging Commands 7 SSH Server ENABLED SSH Server Port 7 22 Telnet Server ENABLED WEB Redirect DISABLED DHCP Relay DISABLED Date Dec 20 2005 18 38 12 SMC AP show hardware This command displays the hardware version of the system Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show hardware Hardware Version Information SMC AP System Logging Commands These commands are used to configure system logging on the access point Table 7 6 System Logging Commands Comma
37. 1x supported Authenticates clients that initiate the 802 1X authentication process Uses standard 802 11 authentication for all others required Requires 802 1X authentication for all clients Default Setting Disabled 7 66 802 1X Authentication 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When 802 1X is disabled the access point does not support 802 1X authentication for any station After successful 802 11 association each client is allowed to access the network e When 802 1X is supported the access point supports 802 1X authentication only for clients initiating the 802 1X authentication process i e the access point does NOT initiate 802 1X authentication For stations initiating 802 1 X only those stations successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network For those stations not initiating 802 1X access to the network is allowed after successful 802 11 association e When 802 1X is required the access point enforces 802 1X authentication for all 802 11 associated stations If 802 1X authentication is not initiated by the station the access point will initiate authentication Only those stations successfully authenticated with 802 1X are allowed to access the network 802 1X does not apply to the 10 100Base TX port Example SMC AP config 802 1x supported SMC AP config 802 1x broadcast key refresh rate This command sets the interval at which the broadcast keys are ref
38. 6 STP Status The STP Status window shows the STP status for each port amp STP information Port Summary old Priority PathCost Status State 1 128 19 Enable Forwarding 10 128 19 Enable Forwarding 1 128 19 Enable Forwarding 12 128 19 Enable Forwarding 13 128 19 Enable Forwarding 14 128 19 Enable Forwarding 15 128 19 Enable Forwarding 16 128 19 Enable Forwarding 17 128 19 Enable Forwarding 18 128 19 Enable Forwarding 19 128 19 Enable Forwarding 20 128 19 Enable Forwarding 21 128 19 Enable Forwarding e ID Displays the port ID number e Priority The priority designated to the specified port e Path Cost Displays the path cost value for the specified port e Status Displays if STP is enabled or disabled for the specified port State Display the STP state for the specified port 6 95 6 System Configuration 6 96 Chapter 7 Command Line Interface Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the over a direct connection to the console port or via a Telnet connection the access point can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the access point s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the access point through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user name is admin
39. 7 57 7 Command Line Interface The following example shows how to download a configuration file SMC AP copy tftp file 1 Application image 2 Config file 3 Boot block image Select the type of download lt 1 2 3 gt ERE TFTP Source file name syscfg TFTP Server IP 192 168 2 29 SMC AP delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete lt filename gt filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Caution Beware of deleting application images from flash memory At least one application image is required in order to boot the access point If there are multiple image files in flash memory and the one used to boot the access point is deleted be sure you first use the bootfile command to update the application image file booted at startup before you reboot the access point Example This example shows how to delete the test cfg configuration file from flash memory SMC AP delete test cfg Are you sure you wish to delete this file lt y n gt SMC AP Related Commands bootfile 7 56 dir 7 59 7 58 Flash F ile Commands 7 dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Command Mode Exec Command Usage File information is shown below Column Heading Description File Name The name of the file Type 2 Operation Code and 5 Configuration file File Size The length of the file in bytes Example
40. 7 90 Enter Ethernet configuration commands one per line SMC AP if ethernet no ip dhcp 7 92 SMC AP if ethernet ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 192 168 1253 7 91 SMC AP if ethernet dns primary server 192 168 1 55 7 91 SMC AP if ethernet dns secondary server 10 1 0 55 7 91 SMC AP config end 7 8 SMC AP show interface ethernet 7 94 Ethernet Interface Information IP Address 192 168 1 2 Subnet Mask z 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 253 Primary DNS 192 168 1 55 Secondary DNS 10 4 9 55 Admin status Up Operational status Up SMC AP 6 6 Advanced Configuration 6 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is an authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of user credentials for each user that requires access to the network A primary RADIUS server must be specified for the access point to implement IEEE 802 1X network access control and Wi Fi Protected Access WPA wireless security A secondary RADIUS server may also be specified as a backup should the primary server fail or become inaccessible In addition the configured RADIUS server can also act as a RADIUS Accounting server and receive user session accounting information from the access point RADIUS Accounting can be used to provide valuable information on user activity in the network Note
41. APs can be identified Table 7 18 Rogue AP Detection Commands Command Function Mode Page rogue ap enable ne the periodic detection of other nearby access GC 7 116 rogue ap authenticate Enables identification of all access points GC 7 117 rogue ap duration Sets the duration that all channels are scanned GC 7 118 rogue ap interval Sets the time between each scan GC 7 118 rogue ap scan Forces an immediate scan of all radio channels GC 7 119 show rogue ap Shows the current database of detected access points Exec 7 120 rogue ap enable This command enables the periodic detection of nearby access points Use the no form to disable periodic detection Syntax no rogue ap enable Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point Therefore avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP 7 116 Rogue AP Detection Commands 7 A rogue AP is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration Rogue access points can be identified by unknown BSSID MAC address or SSID configuration A database of nearby access points should therefo
42. Configures turbo mode to use a faster data rate IC W a 7 98 multicast data rate Configures the maximum rate for transmitting IC W 7 99 multicast packets on the wireless interface channel Configures the radio channel IC W 7 100 transmit power Adjusts the power of the radio signals transmitted IC W 7 100 from the access point radio mode Forces the operating mode ofthe 802 11g radio IC W b g 7 101 preamble Sets the length of the 802 11g signal preamble IC W b g 7 102 antenna control ie the antenna control method to use for the IC W 7 103 antenna id Selects the antenna ID to use for the radio IC W 7 103 antenna location Selects the location ofthe antenna IC W 7 104 7 95 7 Command Line Interface Table 7 17 Wireless Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page beacon interval Configures the rate at which beacon signals are IC W 7 105 transmitted from the access point dtim period Configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode IC W 7 105 must wake up to receive broadcast multicast transmissions fragmentation length Configures the minimum packet size that can be IC W 7 106 fragmented rts threshold Sets the packet size threshold at which an RTS must IC W 7 107 be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications super a Enables Atheros proprietary Super A performance IC W a 7 108 enhancements super g Enables Atheros
43. Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example This example globally enables the Spanning Tree Protocol SMC AP config bridge stp enable SMC AP config 7 85 7 Command Line Interface bridge stp forwarding delay Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for the wireless bridge Use the no form to restore the default Syntax bridge stp forwarding delay lt seconds gt no bridge stp forwarding delay seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example SMC AP config bridge stp forwarding delay 20 SMC AP config bridge stp hello time Use this command to configure the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for the wireless bridge Use the no form to restore the default Syntax bridge stp hello time lt time gt no bridge stp hello time time Time in seconds Range
44. Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 255 characters Timeout Number of seconds the access point waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before resending a request Range 1 60 seconds Default 5 e Retransmit attempts The number of times the access point tries to resend a request to the RADIUS server before authentication fails Range 1 30 Default 3 Accounting Port The RADIUS Accounting server UDP port used for accounting messages Range 0 or 1024 65535 Default 0 disabled Interim Update Timeout The interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server Range 60 86400 Default 3600 seconds Note For the Timeout and Retransmit attempts fields accept the default values unless you experience problems connecting to the RADIUS server over the network Secondary Radius Server Setup Configure a secondary RADIUS server to provide a backup in case the primary server fails The access point uses the secondary server if the primary server fails or becomes inaccessible Once the access point switches over to the secondary server it periodically attempts to establish communication again with primary server If communication with the primary server is re established the secondary server reverts to a backup role 6 9 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for RADIUS From the global configuration mode use the radius server address command to specify the address of the primary or second
45. Each time a client roams to another access point it has to be fully re authenticated This authentication process is time consuming and can disrupt applications running over the network WPA2 includes a mechanism known as pre authentication that allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated The first time a client is authenticated to a wireless network it has to be fully authenticated When the client is about to roam to another access point in the network the access point sends pre authentication messages to the new access point that include the client s security association information Then when the client sends an association request to the new access point the client is 7 129 7 Command Line Interface known to be already authenticated so it proceeds directly to key exchange and association To support pre authentication both clients and access points in the network must be WPA2 enabled Pre authentication requires all access points in the network to be on the same IP subnet Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 wpa pre shared key ASCII agoodsecret SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 Link Integrity Commands The access point provides a link integrity feature that can be used to ensure that wireless clients are connected to resources on the wired network The access point does this by periodically sending Ping messages to a host device in the wired Ethernet network Ifthe access point detec
46. Flashing Green Indicates a medium level of network activity On Green Indicates a high level of network activity 11b g Off No signal detected or the 802 11b g radio is disabled three LEDs Slow Flashing Green The 802 11b g radio is enabled with a low level of network activity FastFlashing Green Indicates a medium level of network activity On Green Indicates a high level of network activity The following table describes the wireless status LEDs in RSSI mode LED Status Description lla Off No signal detected or the 802 11a radio is disabled three LEDs Slow Flashing Green The 802 11a radio is enabled with a low level signal FastFlashing Green Indicates a medium level signal On Green Indicates a high level signal 11b g Off No signal detected or the 802 11b g radio is disabled three LEDs Slow Flashing Green The 802 11b g radio is enabled with a low level signal Fast Flashing Green Indicates a medium level signal On Green Indicates a high level signal 1 4 1 Introduction Ethernet Port The wireless bridge has one 10BASE T 100BASE TX 8 pin DIN port that connects to the power injector module using the included Ethernet cable The Ethernet port connection provides power to the wireless bridge as well as a data link to the local network The wireless bridge appears as an Ethernet node and performs a bridging function by moving packets from the wired LAN to the remote end of the wireless br
47. Identification Enter the global configuration mode and use the system name command to specify a new system name Then return to the Exec mode and use the show system command to display the changes to the system identification settings SMC AP config SMC AP config end SMC AP show system System Information Serial Number System Up time System Name System Location System Contact System Country Code MAC Address Radio A MAC Address Radio G MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway VLAN State IAPP State DHCP Client HTTP Server HTTP Server Port HTTP Session Timeout HTTPS Server HTTPS Server Port Slot Status Boot Rom Version Software Version SSH Server SSH Server Port Telnet Server DHCP Relay SMC AP Enter configuration commands SMC AP config system name R amp D Management VLAN ID AP one per line 0 days 0 hours 32 minutes 22 seconds Enterprise Wireless AP Contact US UNITED STATES 00 12 CF 12 34 60 00 12 CF 12 34 61 00 12 CF 12 34 65 192 168 2 2 255 255 2550 0 0 0 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED 80 300 sec s ENABLED 443 Dual band a g v1 1 6 v4 3 3 1b05 ENABLED 22 ENABLED DISABLED Advanced Configuration 6 TCP IP Settings Configuring the access point with an IP address expands your ability to manage the access point A number of access point features depend on IP addressing to operate Note You can use the web browse
48. Installation AC power Ethernet cable from LAN switch Power LED indicator Ethernet cable to wireless bridge 1 Insert the power cable plug directly into the standard AC receptacle on the power injector 2 Plug the other end of the power cable into a grounded 3 pin socket AC power source Note For International use you may need to change the AC line cord You must use a line cord set that has been approved for the receptacle type in your country 3 Check the LED on top of the power injector to be sure that power is being supplied to the wireless bridge through the Ethernet connection Align Antennas After wireless bridge units have been mounted connected and their radios are operating the antennas must be accurately aligned to ensure optimum performance on the bridge links This alignment process is particularly important for long range point to point links In a point to multipoint configuration the root bridge uses an omnidirectional or sector antenna which does not require alignment but bridge nodes still need to be correctly aligned with the root bridge antennna Point to Point Configurations In a point to point configuration the alignment process requires two people one at each end of the link The use of cell phones or two way radio communication may help with coordination To start you can just point the antennas at each other using binoculars or a compass to set the general direction For
49. MAC address of wireless clients with the local authentication database during 802 11 association remote Authenticate the MAC address of wireless clients with the RADIUS server during 802 1X authentication Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config mac authentication server remote SMC AP config Related Commands address filter entry 7 72 radius server address 7 60 802 1x supplicant user 7 69 mac authentication session timeout This command sets the interval at which associated clients will be re authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication database Use the no form to disable reauthentication Syntax mac authentication session timeout lt minutes gt minutes Re authentication interval Range 0 1440 7 73 7 Command Line Interface Default 0 disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config mac authentication session timeout 1 SMC AP config Filtering Commands The commands described in this section are used to filter communications between wireless clients control access to the management interface from wireless clients and filter traffic using specific Ethernet protocol types Table 7 14 Filtering Commands Command Function Mode Page filter local bridge Disables communication between wireless clients GC 1 75 filter ap manage Prevents wireless clients from accessing the G
50. Name Read Write Defines the SNMP community access string that has read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Maximum length 23 characters case sensitive Default private Trap Destination 1 to 4 Enables recipients up to four of SNMP notifications Trap Destination IP Address Specifies the recipient of SNMP notifications Enter the IP address or the host name Host Name 1 to 63 characters case sensitive Trap Destination Community Name The community string sent with the notification operation Maximum length 23 characters case sensitive Default public Engine ID Sets the engine identifier for the SNMPv3 agent that resides on the access point This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A default engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the access point Range 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters Note If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared All existing users will need to be re configured If you want to change the default engine ID change it first before configuring other SNMP v3 parameters Trap Configuration Enable All Traps Disable All Traps 6 4 sm 6 Trap Configuration Allows selection of specific SNMP n
51. Normal Mode to communicate with wireless clients When multiple access eo ch 5 300 GHz points are deployed in the same area set the channel on 44ch 5220GHz a neighboring access points at least four channels apart to avoid 4g ch 5 240 GHz interference with each other For example in the United States 52 ch 5 260 GHz you can deploy up to four access points in the same area e g 56 ch 5 280 GHz channels 36 56 149 165 Also note that the channel for 60 ch 5 300 GHz wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that used 64 ch 5 320 GHz by the access point to which it is linked Default Channel 60 149 ch 5 745 GHz for normal mode and channel 42 for Turbo mode 153 ch 5 765 GHz 157 ch 5 785 GHz Auto Channel Select Enables the access point to 161 ch 5 805 GHz automatically select an unoccupied radio channel 165 ch 5 625 GHz x Default Enabled Turbo Mode Note Check your country s regulations to see if Auto 42 ch 5 210 GHz Channel can be disabled 45 ch 6210 GHz Transmit Power Adjusts the power of the radio signals 50 ch 5 250 GHz transmitted from the access point The higher the transmission 58 ch 5 290 GHz ft 152 ch 5 760 GHz power the farther the transmission range Power selection is 160 ch 5 800 GHz not just a trade off between coverage area and maximum supported clients You also have to ensure that high power signals do not interfere with the operation of other radio
52. P rou uniquement Ce groupe ne peut pas tre aliment par un dispositif imp dance la terre Si vos alimentations sont du type imp dance la terre ce groupe doit tre aliment par une tension de 230 V 2 P T par le biais d un transformateur d isolement a rapport 1 1 avec un point secondaire de connexion portant l appellation Neutre et avec raccordement direct a la terre masse Cordon lectrique Il doit tre agree dans le pays d utilisation Etats Unis et Le cordon doit avoir regu homologation des UL et un certificat Canada de la CSA Les sp cifications minimales pour un cable flexible sont AWG No 18 ouAWG No 16 pour un cable de longueur inf rieure a 2 metres type SV ou SJ 3 conducteurs Le cordon doit amp tre en mesure d acheminer un courant nominal d au moins 10 A La prise femelle de branchement doit tre du type a mise ala terre mise a la masse et respecter la configuration NEMA 5 15P 15 A 125 V ou NEMA 6 15P 15 A 250 V Danemark La prise male d alimentation doit respecter la section 107 2 D1 de la norme DK2 1a ou DK2 5a Suisse La prise male d alimentation doit respecter la norme SEV ASE 1011 Europe La prise secteur doit amp tre conforme aux normes CEE 7 7 SCHUKO LE cordon secteur doit porter la mention lt HAR gt ou lt BASEC gt et doit tre de type HO3VVF3GO 75 minimum vi Bitte unbedingt vor dem Einbauen des Ger ts die folgenden
53. Pinouts Pin MDI Signal Name Transmit Data plus TD Transmit Data minus TD Receive Data plus RD GND Positive Vport GND Positive Vport Receive Data minus RD 48V feeding power Negative Vport 48V feeding power Negative Vport Note The and signs represent the polarity of the wires that make up each wire pair co SD MY e Ww rm Straight Through Wiring Because the 10 100 Mbps port on the access point uses an MDI pin configuration you must use straight through cable for network connections to hubs or switches that only have MDI X ports However if the device to which you are connecting supports auto MDIX operation you can use either straight through or crossover cable EIA TIA 568B RJ 45 Wiring Standard 10 100BASE TX Straight through Cable White Orange Stripe I Orange 1 IA White Green Stripe 1 EndA 2 2 Ze 3 FA Blue S 3 x End ii g OT a Sb ite Blue Stripe 5 6 6 7 Green Z H N G i White Brown Stripe Brown B 2 Twisted P air Cable Assignments B Crossover Wiring Because the 10 100 Mbps port on the access point uses an MDI pin configuration you must use crossover cable for network connections to PCs servers or other end nodes that only have MDI ports However if the device to which you are connecting
54. States US China CN Israel IL Panama PA Uruguay UY Colombia co Italy IT Peru PE Uzbekistan UZ Costa Rica CR Japan JP Philippines PH Yemen YE Croatia HR Jordan JO Poland PL Venezuela VE Cyprus CY Kazakhstan KZ P ortugal PT Vietnam VN Czech CZ North Korea KP Puerto Rico PR Zimbabwe ZW Republic Denmark DK Korea KR Slovenia SI Republic Elsalvador SV Luxembourg LU South Africa ZA Default Setting US for units sold in the United States 99 no country set for units sold in other countries Command Mode Exec 7 13 7 Command Line Interface Command Usage e If you purchased an access point outside of the United States the country code must be set before radio functions are enabled The available Country Code settings can be displayed by using the country 2 command Example SMC AP country tw SMC AP prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt lt string gt no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 32 characters Default Setting SMC AP Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config prompt RD2 RD2 config system name This command specifies or modifies the system name for this device Use the no form to restore the default system name Syntax system name lt name gt no system name name The name of this host Maximum length 32 characters
55. Syntax vap lt vap id gt vap id The number that identifies the VAP interface Options 0 3 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Example SMC AP if wireless g vap 0 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 7 97 7 Command Line Interface speed This command configures the maximum data rate at which the access point transmits unicast packets Syntax speed lt speed gt speed Maximum access speed allowed for wireless clients Options for 802 11a 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps Options for 802 11b g 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps Default Setting 54 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage The maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate The lower the data rate the longer the transmission distance Please refer to the table for maximum distances on page C 5 When turbo mode is enabled page 7 109 for 802 1 1a the effective maximum speed specified by this command is double the entered value e g setting the speed to 54 Mbps limits the effective maximum speed to 108 Mbps Example SMC AP if wireless g speed 6 SMC AP if wireless g turbo This command sets the access point to an enhanced proprietary modulation mode not regulated in IEEE 802 11a that provides a higher data rate of up to 108 Mbps Syntax turbo lt static dynamic gt no turbo static Always uses turbo mode dyn
56. System Configuration The AP System Configuration table displays the basic system configuration settings System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up Ethernet MAC The physical layer address for the Ethernet port Radio A MAC The physical layer address for the 802 11a interface Radio G MAC The physical layer address for the 802 1 1b g interface System Name Name assigned to this system System Contact Administrator responsible for the system IP Address IP address of the management interface for this device IP Default Gateway IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments HTTP Server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled HTTP Server Port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTP interface Software Version Shows the software version number Bootrom Version Show the bootrom version number Hardware Version Shows the hardware version number 6 89 6 System Configuration AP Wireless Configuration The AP Wireless Configuration tables display the radio and VAP interface settings listed below Note that Interface Wireless A refers to the 802 11a radio and Interface Wireless G refers the 802 11b g radio current radio interface settings use the show interface wireless a or show SSID The service set identifier for the VAP interface Radio Channel The radio channel through which the access point communicates with wireless
57. The management VLAN is for managing the access point through remote management tools such as the web interface SSH SNMP or Telnet The access point only accepts management traffic that is tagged with the specified management VLAN ID All wireless clients associated to the access point are assigned to a VLAN If IEEE 802 1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients specific VLAN IDs can be configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client If a client is not assigned to a specific VLAN or if 802 1X is not used the client is assigned to the default VLAN for the VAP interface with which it is associated The access point only allows traffic tagged with assigned VLAN IDs or default VLAN IDs to access clients associated on each VAP interface e When VLAN support is enabled on the access point traffic passed to the wired network is tagged with the appropriate VLAN ID either an assigned client VLAN ID default VLAN ID or the management VLAN ID Traffic received from the wired network must also be tagged with one of these known VLAN IDs Received traffic that has an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN tag is dropped When VLAN support is disabled the access point does not tag traffic passed to the wired network and ignores the VLAN tags on any received frames Note Before enabling VLAN tagging on the access point be sure to configure the attached network switch port to support tagged VLAN frames from the access point s managemen
58. This guide assumes that you have already configured RADIUS server s to support the access point Configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope of this guide refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server software 6 7 6 System Configuration Secondary RADIUS Server Setup 6 8 Advanced Configuration 6 MAC Address Format MAC addresses can be specified in one of four formats using no delimeter with a single dash delimeter with multiple dash delimeters and with multiple colon delimeters VLAN ID Format A VLAN ID a number between 1 and 4094 can be assigned to each client after successful authentication using IEEE 802 1X and a central RADIUS server The user VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for each user authorized to access the network VLAN IDs can be entered as hexadecimal numbers or as ASCII strings Primary Radius Server Setup Configure the following settings to use RADIUS authentication on the access point Radius Status Enabling Radius Status allows the settings of RADIUS authentication Default Enable IP Address Specifies the IP address or host name of the RADIUS server Port The UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication messages Range 1024 65535 Default 1812 Key A shared text string used to encrypt messages between the access point and the RADIUS server Be sure that the same text string is specified on the RADIUS server
59. To display the current settings use the show authentication command from the Exec mode SMC AP config mac authentication server remote 7 73 SMC AP config mac authentication session timeout 300 7 73 SMC AP config exit SMC AP show authentication 7 69 Authentication Information MAC Authentication Server REMOTE MAC Auth Session Timeout Value 300 min 802 1x supplicant DISABLED 802 1x supplicant user EMPTY 802 1x supplicant password EMPTY Address Filtering DENIED System Default DENY addresses not found in filter table Filter Table MAC Address Status 00 70 50 cc 99 la DENIED 00 70 50 cc 99 1b ALLOWED SMC AP CLI Command for 802 1x Supplicant To configure the access point to operate as a 802 1X supplicant first use the 802 1X supplicant user command to set a user name and password for the access point then use the 802 1X supplicant command to enable the feature To display the current settings use the show authentication command from the Exec mode not shown in the following example SMC AP config 802 1X supplicant user secureAP dotixpass 7 69 SMC AP config 802 1X supplicant 7 69 SMC AP config 6 16 Advanced Configuration 6 Filter Control The access point can employ network traffic frame filtering to control access to network resources and increase security You can prevent communications between wireless clients and prevent access point management from wirel
60. a new console session with the user name admin The command prompt displays as SMC AP for Exec mode Username admin Password system login password SMC AP Configuration Commands Configuration commands are used to modify access point settings These commands modify the running configuration and are saved in memory The configuration commands are organized into four different modes e Global Configuration GC These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as username and password e Interface Ethernet Configuration IC E These commands modify the Ethernet port configuration and include command such as dns and ip e Interface Wireless Configuration IC W These commands modify the wireless port configuration of global parameters for the radio and include commands such as channel and transmit power Interface Wireless Virtual Access Point Configuration IC W VAP These commands modify the wireless port configuration for each VAP and include commands such as ssid and authentication To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Exec mode The system prompt will change to SMC AP config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands SMC AP configure SMC AP config To enter Interface mode you must enter the interface ethernet or interface wireless a or interface wireless g comma
61. access point 7 105 7 Command Line Interface will save all broadcast multicast frames for the Basic Service Set BSS and forward them after every second beacon Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast multicast frames in a more timely manner causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power faster Using higher DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power Save mode but delays the transmission of broadcast multicast frames Example SMC AP if wireless g dtim period 100 SMC AP if wireless g fragmentation length This command configures the minimum packet size that can be fragmented when passing through the access point Syntax fragmentation length lt ength gt length Minimum packet size for which fragmentation is allowed Range 256 2346 bytes Default Setting 2346 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage If the packet size is smaller than the preset Fragment size the packet will not be segmented Fragmentation of the PDUs Package Data Unit can increase the reliability of transmissions because it increases the probability of a successful transmission due to smaller frame size If there is significant interference present or collisions due to high network utilization try setting the fragment size to send smaller fragments This will speed up the retransmission of smaller frames However it is more efficient to set the fragmen
62. access point from wireless clients Management interfaces include the web Telnet or SNMP Default Disabled e Disabled Allows management access from wireless clients Enabled Blocks management access from wireless clients 6 17 6 System Configuration Uplink Port MAC Address Filtering Status Prevents traffic with specified source MAC addresses from being forwarded to wireless clients through the access point You can add a maximum of four MAC addresses to the filter table Default Disabled e MAC Address Specvifies a MAC address to filter in the form XX XX XX XX XX XX e Permission Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table Ethernet Type Filter Controls checks on the Ethernet type of all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table Default Disabled Disabled Access point does not filter Ethernet protocol types Enabled Access point filters Ethernet protocol types based on the configuration of protocol types in the filter table If the status of a protocol is set to ON the protocol is filtered from the access point Note Ethernet protocol types not listed in the filtering table are always forwarded by the access point Ethernet Type Filter Enables or disables Ethernet filtering on the port Default Disabled CLI Commands for Bridge Filtering Use the filter local bridge command from the global configuration mode to prevent wireless to wire
63. addresses and filtering policy must be configured on the RADIUS server Table 7 13 MAC Address Authentication Command Function Mode Page address filter default Sets filtering to allow or deny listed addresses GC 7 71 address filter entry Enters a MAC address in the filter table GC 7 12 address filter delete Removes a MAC address from the filter table GC 7 12 mac authentication server Sets address filtering to be performed with local or GC 7 73 remote options mac authentication Sets the interval at which associated clients will be GC 7 73 session timeout re authenticated with the RADIUS server authentication database show authentication Shows all 802 1X authentication settings as well as the Exec 7 69 address filter table address filter default This command sets filtering to allow or deny listed MAC addresses Syntax address filter default lt allowed denied gt allowed Only MAC addresses entered as denied in the address filtering table are denied denied Only MAC addresses entered as allowed in the address filtering table are allowed Default allowed Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config address filter default denied SMC AP config 7 71 7 Command Line Interface Related Commands address filter entry 7 72 802 1x supplicant user 7 69 address filter entry This command enters a MAC address in the filter table
64. air conditioning equipment tinted windows wire fences or water pipes The wireless bridge antennas at both ends of the link must be positioned with the same polarization direction either horizontal or vertical Antenna Polarization The wireless bridge s integrated antenna sends a radio signal that is polarized in a particular direction The antenna s receive sensitivity is also higher for radio signals that have the same polarization To maximize the performance of the wireless link both antennas must be set to the same polarization direction The unit should be mounted with the antenna sockets facing upwards AH N 1 Antenna sockets should IR point upwards in a vertical manner IH Wy 1618 16 3 4 Ethernet Cabling 3 Radio Interference The avoidance of radio interference is an important part of wireless link planning Interference is caused by other radio transmissions using the same or an adjacent channel frequency You should first scan your proposed site using a spectrum analyzer to determine if there are any strong radio signals using the 802 11a channel frequencies Always use a channel frequency that is furthest away from another signal If radio interference is still a problem with your wireless bridge link changing the antenna polarization direction may improve the situation This is only recommended when the integrated internal antenna is used Weather Conditions When planning wireless bridge
65. another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the access point with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 Atthe prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the SMC AP prompt to show that you are using executive access mode i e Exec 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password SMC AP Caution You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces ethernet show and interfaces are keywords and ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter commands that requir
66. data encryption through the web or CLI in order to enable all types of encryption WEP TKIP or AES in the access point CLI Commands for WEP Shared Key Security To enable WEP shared key security for the 802 11g interface use the interface wireless g command from the CLI configuration mode to access the interface mode for the 802 11g radio First use the 6 77 6 System Configuration key command to define up to four WEP keys that can be used for all VAP interfaces on the radio Then use the vap command to access each VAP interface to configure other security settings From the VAP interface configuration mode use the auth command to enable WEP shared key authentication which enables encryption automatically Then set one key as the transmit key for the VAP interface using the transmit key command To view the current security settings use the show interface wireless g 0 3 command from the Exec mode 6 78 SMC AP config interface wireless g Enter Wireless configuration commands 7 90 one per line SMC AP if wireless g key 1 128 as SMC AP if wireless g vap 0 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 auth shared key Data Encryption is set to enabled 7 124 7 97 7 124 cii abcdeabcdeabc Remember to set the share key using key command SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 transmit key 1 SMC AP if wireless g VAP O exit SMC AP show interface wireless g 0 Wireless Interface Information Description SSID Cha
67. description RD AP 3 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 ssid This command configures the service set identifier SSID Syntax ssid lt string gt string The name of a basic service set supported by the access point Range 0 7 characters Default Setting 802 11a Radio SMC_VAP_11A 0 to 3 802 11g Radio SMC_VAP_11G 0 to 3 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage Clients that want to connect to the wireless network via an access point must set their SSIDs to the same as that of the access point Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 ssid RD AP 3 SMC AP if wireless g 7 109 7 Command Line Interface closed system This command prohibits access to clients without a pre configured SSID Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax closed system no closed system Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage When closed system is enabled the access point will not include its SSID in beacon messages Nor will it respond to probe requests from clients that do not include a fixed SSID Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 closed system SMC AP if wireless g max association This command configures the maximum number of clients that can be associated with the access point at the same time Syntax max association lt count gt count Maximum number of associated stations Range 0 64 Default Setting 64
68. determine which clients are using WPA security and which are using legacy WEP The access point uses TKIP unicast data encryption keys for WPA clients and WEP unicast keys for WEP clients The global encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients therefore it restricts encryption to a WEP key When access is opened to both WPA and WEP clients no authentication is provided for the WEP clients through shared keys To support authentication for WEP clients in this mixed mode configuration you can use either MAC authentication or 802 1X authentication WPA2 WPA was introduced as an interim solution for the vulnerability of WEP pending the ratification of the IEEE 802 11i wireless security standard In effect the WPA security features are a subset of the 802 11i standard WPA2 includes the now ratified 802 111 standard but also offers backward compatibility with WPA Therefore WPA2 includes the same 802 1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption The main differences and enhancements in WPA2 can be summarized as follows Advanced Encryption Standard AES WPA2 uses AES Counter Mode encryption with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code CBC MAC for message integrity The AES Counter Mode CBCMAC Protocol AES CCMP provides extremely robust data confidentiality using a 128 bit key The AES CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement for WPA2 However the
69. each client and are used to encrypt and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the access point You can also enable broadcast key rotation so the access point provides a dynamic broadcast key and changes it at a specified interval 6 86 Radio Interface 6 Open the Security page and click More for one of the VAP interfaces it 802 11g VAP 0 m 802 1x Setup Disable 802 1 authentications not allowed Supported Clients may or may not use 902 1x Required Client must use 002 1x If 802 1x supported or required is selected then RADIUS setup must be completed Broadcast Key Refresh Rate 0 minutes 0 Disabled Session Key Refresh Rote 0 minutes 0 Disabled 802 1x Reauthentication Refresh Rate a minutes 0 Disabled You can enable 802 1X as optionally supported or as required to enhance the security of the wireless network Default Disable Disable The access point does not support 802 1X authentication for any wireless client After successful wireless association with the access point each client is allowed to access the network e Supported The access point supports 802 1X authentication only for clients initiating the 802 1X authentication process i e the access point does not initiate 802 1X authentication For clients initiating 802 1X only those successfully authenticated are allowed to access the network For those clients not initiating 802 1X access to the network is allowed a
70. fiir die 10 100BASE TX Verbindungen ein Kabel der Kategorie 5e oder bevorzugterweise ein UTP Kabel Hinweis Der RJ 45 Anschluss am njector Modul ist ein MDI Port Verwenden Sie ein Crossover Kabel fiir eine Direktverbindung mit einem Computer um den Link zu testen D 7 D Montieren der Bridge Netzstrom Ethernet Kabel vom LAN Switch Betriebsanzeige LED Ethernet Kabel zur drahtlosen Bridge 1 Stecken Sie den Netzleitungsstecker direkt in den standardm igen Netzanschluss des Injector Moduls 2 Verbinden Sie das andere Ende der Netzleitung mit einer geerdeten 3 poligen Netzstromquelle Hinweis Bei internationaler Verwendung m ssen Sie eventuell die Netzleitung austauschen Sie m ssen eine Netzleitung verwenden die f r den Steckdosentyp in Ihrem Land gepr ft und abgenommen ist 3 Pr fen Sie die LED oben auf dem Injector Modul um sich zu vergewissern dass die drahtlose Bridge ber die Ethernet Verbindung mit Strom versorgt wird D 8 Glossary 10BASE T IEEE 802 3 specification for 10 Mbps Ethernet over two pairs of Category 3 or better UTP cable 100BASE TX IEEE 802 3u specification for 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet over two pairs of Category 5 or better UTP cable Access Point An internetworking device that seamlessly connects wired and wireless networks Access points attached to a wired network support the creation of multiple radio cells that enable roaming throughout a facility
71. for tech support dhcp relay Show DHCP Relay Configuration event log Show event log on console filters Show filters hardware Show hardware version history Display the session history interface Show interface information line TTY line information link integrity Show link integrity information logging Show the logging buffers radius Show radius server rogue ap Show Rogue ap Stations snmp Show snmp configuration sntp Show sntp configuration station Show 802 11 station table system Show system information version Show system version SMC AP show The command show interface will display the following information SMC AP show interface ethernet Show Ethernet interface wireless Show wireless interface lt ar gt SMC AP show interface 7 3 7 Command Line Interface Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the keywords starting with s SMC AP show s snmp sntp station system SMC AP show s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of acommand or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no l
72. key command to select the shared key authentication type use the key command to configure at least one key and use the transmit key command to assign a key to one of the VAP interfaces e If WEP option is enabled all wireless clients must be configured with the same shared keys to communicate with the access point The encryption index length and type configured in the access point must match those configured in the clients Example SMC AP if wireless g key 1 64 hex 1234512345 SMC AP if wireless g key 2 128 ascii asdeipadjsipd SMC AP if wireless g key 3 64 hex 12345123451234512345123456 SMC AP if wireless g Related Commands key 7 124 encryption 7 123 transmit key 7 125 7 124 Wireless Security Commands 7 transmit key This command sets the index of the key to be used for encrypting data frames for broadcast or multicast traffic transmitted from the VAP to wireless clients Syntax transmit key lt index gt index Key index Range 1 4 Default Setting 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage If you use WEP key encryption option the access point uses the transmit key to encrypt multicast and broadcast data signals that it sends to client devices Other keys can be used for decryption of data from clients e When using IEEE 802 1X the access point uses a dynamic key to encrypt unicast and broadcast messages to 802 1X enabled clients Howev
73. link integrity ping fail retry 10 SMC AP config link integrity ethernet detect This command enables an integrity check to determine whether or not the access point is connected to the wired Ethernet Syntax no link integrity ethernet detect Default Setting Disabled 7 132 Link Integrity Commands 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config link integrity ethernet detect Notification Ethernet Link Detect SUCCESS RADIO S ENABLED SMC AP config show link integrity This command displays the current link integrity configuration Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show link integrity Link Integrity Information Ethernet Detect Enabled Ping Detect Enabled Target IP Name 192 168 0 140 Ping Fail Retry 6 Ping Interval 5 30 SMC AP 7 133 7 Command Line Interface IAPP Commands The command described in this section enables the protocol signaling required to ensure the successful handover of wireless clients roaming between different 802 11f compliant access points In other words the 802 11f protocol can ensure successful roaming between access points in a multi vendor environment iapp This command enables the protocol signaling required to hand over wireless clients roaming between different 802 11f compliant access points Use the no form to disable 802 11f signaling Syntax no iapp Default Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Com
74. links you must take into account any extreme weather conditions that are known to affect your location Consider these factors e Temperature The wireless bridge is tested for normal operation in temperatures from 40 C to 60 C Operating in temperatures outside of this range may cause the unit to fail Wind Velocity The wireless bridge can operate in winds up to 44 m s and survive higher wind speeds up to 66 m s You must consider the known maximum wind velocity and direction at the site and be sure that any supporting structure such as a pole mast or tower is built to withstand this force Lightning The wireless bridge includes its own built in lightning protection However you should make sure that the unit any supporting structure and cables are all properly grounded Additional protection using lightning rods lightning arrestors or Surge suppressors may also be employed Rain The wireless bridge is weatherproofed against rain Also prolonged heavy rain has no significant effect on the radio signal However it is recommended to apply weatherproof sealing tape around the Ethernet port and antenna connectors for extra protection If moisture enters a connector it may cause a degradation in performance or even a complete failure of the link Snow and Ice Falling snow like rain has no significant effect on the radio signal However a build up of snow or ice on antennas may cause the link to fail In
75. log messages 6 34 6 93 6 95 7 30 server 6 33 7 30 login CLI 7 1 web 5 3 logon authentication RADIUS client 6 14 7 60 M MAC address authentication 6 13 7 71 7 72 maximum associated clients 6 59 Index 2 maximum data rate 7 99 802 11a interface 7 99 802 11g interface 7 99 MDI RJ 45 pin configuration 1 6 N network topologies infrastructure 2 2 infrastructure for roaming 2 3 O OFDM 1 1 open system 6 70 7 110 operating frequency C 2 P package checklist 1 2 password configuring 6 28 6 31 7 15 management 6 28 6 31 7 15 PoE 4 7 specifications C 2 port priority STA 7 88 Power 1 6 Power over Ethernet See PoE power supply specifications C 2 PSK 6 81 R radio channel 802 11a interface 7 100 802 119 interface 6 69 7 100 RADIUS 6 7 6 81 7 60 RADIUS logon authentication 6 14 7 60 Remote Authentication Dial in User Service See RADIUS Request to Send See RTS reset 6 31 7 10 resetting the access point 6 31 7 10 restarting the system 6 31 7 10 RJ 45 port configuring duplex mode 7 93 configuring speed 7 93 RSSI BNC 1 7 RTS threshold 6 61 7 107 S Secure Socket Layer See SSL security options 6 70 6 71 session key 6 86 6 87 7 68 shared key 6 76 7 124 Simple Network Time Protocol See SNTP SNMP 6 41 7 41 community name 7 42 community string 7 42 enabling traps 6 42 7 43 trap destination 6 42 7 44 trap manager 6 42 7 44 SNTP 6 35 7 35 enabling client 6 35 7 35 server 6
76. mode Then type country to display the list of countries Select the code for your country and enter the country command again following by your country code e g tw for Taiwan SMC AP country tw SMC AP Note Command examples shown later in this manual abbreviate the console prompt to AP for simplicity Logging In There are only a few basic steps you need to complete to connect the access point to your corporate network and provide network access to wireless clients The access point can be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape 6 2 or above Enter the default IP address http 192 168 2 2 Logging In Enter the username admin the password is null so just press just leave it blank and click LOGIN For information on configuring a user name and password see page 6 28 Username Password Copyright c 2006 SMC All rights reserved We suggest you to use IE 6 0 or above or Netscape 4 0 or above browser 5 3 5 Initial Configuration The home page displays the Main Menu 5 4 Chapter 6 System Configuration Before continuing with advanced configuration first complete the initial configuration steps described in Chapter 4 to set up an IP address for the access point The access point can be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape 6 2 or above Enter the configured IP ad
77. proprietary Super G performance IC W b g 7 108 enhancements description Adds a description to the wireless interface IC W VAP 7 109 ssid Configures the service set identifier IC W VAP 7 109 closed system Opens access to clients without a pre configured IC W VAP 7 110 max association Configures the maximum number of clients thatcan IC W VAP 7 110 be associated with the access point at the same time assoc timeout interval Configures the idle time interval when no frames are IC W VAP 7 111 sent after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interface auth timeout value Configures the time interval after which clients must IC W VAP 7 111 be re authenticated shutdown Disables the wireless interface IC W VAP 7 11 show interface wireless Shows the status for the wireless interface Exec 7 113 show station Shows the wireless clients associated with the access Exec 7 115 7 96 point Wireless Interface Commands 7 interface wireless This command enters wireless interface configuration mode Syntax interface wireless lt a g gt a 802 11a radio interface e g 802 11g radio interface Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify the 802 11a interface enter the following command SMC AP config interface wireless a SMC AP if wireless a vap This command provides access to the VAP Virtual Access Point interface configuration mode
78. station has been successfully authenticated by the RADIUS server localMacAddrAuthSuccess A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the local database on the access point e localMacAddrAuthFail A client station has failed authentication with the local MAC address database on the access point e iappStationRoamedFrom A client station has roamed from another access point identified by its IP address e jappStationRoamedTo A client station has roamed to another access point identified by its IP address e iappContextDataSent A client station s Context Data has been sent to another access point with which the station has associated sntpServerFail The access point has failed to set the time from the configured SNTP server wirelessExternalAntenna An external antenna has been enabled e dot11WirelessStationDeauthenticate A client station has de authenticated from the network 6 43 6 System Configuration dot11StationDisassociate A client station no longer associates with the network dot11StationAuthenticateFail A client station has tried and failed to authenticate to the network Enable All Traps Click the button to enable all the available traps e Disable All Traps Click the button to disable all the available traps CLI Commands for SNMP and Trap Configuration Use the snmp server enable server command from the global configuration mode to enable the SNMP a
79. supports auto MDIX operation you can use either straight through or crossover cable EIA TIA 568B RJ 45 Wiring Standard 10 100BASE TX Crossover Cable White Orange Stripe Orange 1 White Green Stripe 1 EndA Pr 2 2 Ww End B Bl zu gt A ua SS lt White Blue Stripe 5 Ks e7 D 7 ss Green 7 8 SS 8 White Brown Stripe Brown 8 Pin DIN Connector Pinout The Ethernet cable from the power injector connects to an 8 pin DIN connector on the wireless bridge This connector is described in the following figure and table a oOo NI 8 Pin DIN Ethernet Port Pinout Pin Signal Name 1 Transmit Data plus TD 2 Transmit Data minus TD 3 Receive Data plus RD 4 48 VDC power 5 48 VDC power 6 Receive Data minus RD 7 Return power 8 Return power Note The and signs represent the polarity of the wires that make up each wire pair B 3 B Cables and Pinouts 8 Pin DIN to RJ 45 Cable Wiring To construct an extended Ethernet cable to connect from the power injector s RJ 45 Output port to the wireless bridge s 8 pin DIN connector follow the wiring diagram below Use Category 5 or better UTP or STP cable maximum length 100 m 328 ft and be sure to connect all four wire pairs Note To construct a reliable Ethernet cable always u
80. sysRadiusServerChanged The access point has changed from the primary RADIUS server to the secondary or from the secondary to the primary sysSystemDown The access point is about to shutdown and reboot sysSystemUp The access point is up and running Default Setting All traps enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host and snmp server enable server commands to enable SNMP notifications Example SMC AP config no snmp server trap dot11StationAssociation SMC AP config snmp server engine id This command is used for SNMP v3 It is used to uniquely identify the access point among all access points in the network Use the no form to delete the engine ID Syntax snmp server engine id lt engine id gt no snmp server engine id engine id Enter engine id in hexadecimal 5 32 characters Default Setting Enabled 7 46 SNMP Commands 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is used in conjunction with the snmp server user command Entering this command invalidates all engine IDs that have been previously configured If the enginelD is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users Example SMC AP config snmp server engine id 1a 2b 3c 4d 00 ff SMC AP config snmp server user This command configures the SNMP v3 users tha
81. the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate this equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation IMPORTANT NOTE FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters 8 inches between the radiator and your body This transmitter must not be co located or operatin
82. the management interface Start with one antenna fixed and then perform the following procedure on the other antenna Note The RSSI value can be configured through management interfaces to display a value for specific WDS bridge links See page 6 40 for more information 11blg Power COLO High 11a Signal 1a O O O Link big Power 7 UU Medium 11a Signal ge 41a Olink 1O O Power CUO Low 11a Signal w 1120 O O Link 4 9 Hardware Installation Pan the antenna horizontally back and forth while checking the LEDs If using the pole mounting bracket with the unit you must rotate the mounting bracket around the pole Other external antenna brackets may require a different horizontal adjustment Find the point where the signal is strongest all LEDs on and secure the horizontal adjustment in that position Note Sometimes there may not be a central lobe peak because vertical alignment is too 4 10 far off only two similar peaks for the side lobes are detected In this case fix the antenna so that it is halfway between the two peaks Loosen the vertical adjustment on the mounting bracket and tilt the antenna slowly up and down while checking the LEDs Find the point where the signal is strongest and secure the vertical adjustment in that position Chapter 5 Initial Configuration The Dual band Outdoor Access Point Bridge offers a variety of management opti
83. the section Testing Basic Link Operation in this chapter The wireless bridge includes its own bracket kit for mounting the unit to a 1 5 to 2 inch diameter steel pole or tube or to a wall The pole mounting bracket allows the unit to be mounted to part of a radio mast or tower structure The wall mounting option enables it to be fixed to a building wall or roof when using external antennas Hardware installation of the wireless bridge involves these steps 1 Mount the unit on a wall pole mast or tower using the mounting bracket 2 Mount external antennas directly on the bridge or on the same supporting structure as the bridge and connect them to the bridge unit 3 Connect the Ethernet cable and a grounding wire to the unit 4 Connect the power injector to the Ethernet cable a local LAN switch and an AC power source 5 Align antennas at both ends of the link Testing Basic Link Operation Set up the units over a very short range 15 to 25 feet either outdoors or indoors Connect the units as indicated in this chapter and be sure to perform all the basic configuration tasks outlined in Chapter 5 Initial Configuration When you are satisfied that the links are operating correctly proceed to mount the units in their intended locations Mount the Unit The bridge can be mounted in the following ways using the included mounting bracket e Toa 1 5 to 2 inch diameter Pole To a wall 4 1 4 Hardware Instal
84. transmit key Interface Detail Settings Authentication Open System Encryption Enable 802 1x Supported Set 802 1x key refresh and reauthentication rates Local RADIUS or Disabled Dynamic WEP and 802 1x WPA Interface Detail Settings Authentication WPA Encryption Enable WPA Configuration Supported Cipher Suite WEP 802 1x Required Set 802 1x key refresh and reauthentication rates Local or Disabled Yes Static and dynamic 802 1x WEP keys and 802 1x WPA Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys Selecta WEP transmit key Interface Detail Settings Authentication WPA Encryption Enable WPA Configuration Supported Cipher Suite WEP 802 1x Supported Set 802 1x key refresh and reauthentication rates Local or Disabled Yes 6 73 6 System Configuration Table 6 3 Security Combinations Client Security Configuration Summary MAC RADIUS Combination Authentication Server 802 1x WPA2 only Interface Detail Settings Local or Disabled Yes Authentication WPA2 Encryption Enable WPA Configuration Required Cipher Suite AES CCMP 802 1x Required Set 802 1x key refresh and reauthentication rates WPA2 Pre Shared Interface Detail Settings Local or Disabled No Key only Authentication WPA2 P SK Encryption Enable WPA Configuraton Required Cipher Suite AES CCMP 802 1x Disable WPA Pre shared Key Type Hexadicmal or Alphanumeric Enter a WPA Pre shared
85. two different colors For example one wire might be green and the other green with white stripes Also an RJ 45 connector must be attached to both ends of the cable Caution Each wire pair must be attached to the RJ 45 connectors in a specific orientation See Straight Through Wiring on page B 2 and Crossover Wiring on page B 3 for an explanation Caution DO NOT plug a phone jack connector into the RJ 45 port Use only twisted pair cables with RJ 45 connectors that conform with FCC standards The following figure illustrates how the pins on the RJ 45 connector are numbered Be sure to hold the connectors in the same orientation when attaching the wires to the pins 10 100BASE TX Pin Assignments Use unshielded twisted pair UTP or shielded twisted pair STP cable for RJ 45 connections 100 ohm Category 3 or better cable for 10 Mbps connections or 100 ohm Category 5 or better cable for 100 Mbps connections Also be sure that the length of any twisted pair connection does not exceed 100 meters 328 feet The RJ 45 port on the access point is wired with MDI pinouts This means that you must use crossover cables for connections to PCs or servers and straight through cable for connections to switches or hubs However when connecting to devices that support automatic MDI MDI X pinout configuration you can use either straight through or crossover cable B 1 B Cables and Pinouts Table B 1 10 100BASE TX MDI Port
86. units support 5 GHz point to multipoint links using various external antenna options e Both SMC2890W AG and SMC2891W AG units also support access point services for the 5 GHz and 2 4 GHz radios using various external antenna options e Maximum data rate up to 108 Mbps on the 802 11a 5 GHz radio e Outdoor weatherproof design e IEEE 802 11a and 802 11b g compliant e Local network connection via 10 100 Mbps Ethernet port e Powered through its Ethernet cable connection to the power injector module e Includes wall and pole mount bracket e Security through 64 128 152 bit Wired Equivalent Protection WEP or 128 bit Advanced Encryption Standard AES encryption e Scans all available channels and selects the best channel and data rate based on the signal to noise ratio e Manageable through an easy to use web browser interface command line via Telnet or SNMP network management tools 1 8 Chapter 2 Network Configuration The Dual band Outdoor Access Point Bridge system provides access point and bridging services through either the 5 GHz or 2 4 GHz radio interfaces The wireless bridge units can be used just as normal 802 11a b g access points connected to a local wired LAN providing connectivity and roaming services for wireless clients in an outdoor area Units can also be used purely as bridges connecting remote LANs Alternatively you can employ both access point and bridging functions together offering a flexible and conve
87. wired network that supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tags The VLAN commands supported by the access point are listed below Table 7 21 VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page vlan Enables a single VLAN for all traffic GC 7 135 management Configures the management VLAN for the access point GC 7 136 vlanid vlan id Configures the default VLAN forthe VAP interface IC W VAP 7 136 vlan This command enables VLANs for all traffic Use the no form to disable VLANs Syntax no vlan enable Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Description When VLANs are enabled the access point tags frames received from wireless clients with the VLAN ID configured for each client on the RADIUS server If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a client on the RADIUS server then the frames are tagged with the access point s native VLAN ID 7 135 7 Command Line Interface Traffic entering the Ethernet port must be tagged with a VLAN ID that matches the access point s native VLAN ID or with a VLAN tag that matches one of the wireless clients currently associated with the access point Example SMC AP config vlan enable Reboot system now lt y n gt y Related Commands management vlanid 7 136 management vlanid This command configures the management VLAN ID for the access point Syntax management vlanid lt vian id gt vian id Management VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Se
88. with the key command When any WPA or WPA2 option is selected clients are authenticated using 802 1X via a RADIUS server Each client must be WPA enabled or support 802 1X client software The 802 1X settings see 802 1 X Authentication on page 77 66 and RADIUS server details see RADIUS Client on page 77 60 must be configured on the access point A RADIUS server must also be configured and be available in the wired network If a WPA WPA2 mode that operates over 802 1 X is selected WPA WPA2 WPA WPA2 mixed or WPA WPA2 PSK mixed the 802 1X settings see 802 1X Authentication on page 77 66 and RADIUS server details see RADIUS Client on page 77 60 must be configured Be sure you have also configured a RADIUS server on the network before enabling authentication Also note that each client has to be WPA enabled or support 802 1 X client software A RADIUS server must also be configured and be available in the wired network If a WPA WPA2 Pre shared Key mode is selected WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or WPA WPA2 PSK mixed the key must first be generated and distributed to all wireless clients before they can successfully associate with the access point Use the wpa preshared key command to configure the key see key on page 77 124 and transmit key on page 77 125 WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for networks moving from WPA security to WPA2 WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both WPA and WPA2 clients to associate t
89. word typed Esc B Moves the cursor backward one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or Erases a mistake when entering a command backspace key Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 7 2 Command Groups 7 6 specified servers Command Group Description Page General Basic commands for entering configuration mode restarting the system 7 7 or quitting the CLI System Management Controls username password web browser management options and 7 1 a variety of other system information System Logging Configures system logging parameters 7 29 System Clock Configures SNTP and system clock settings 7 34 DHCP Relay Configures the access point to send DHCP requests from clients to 7 39 General Commands 7 Table 7 2 Command Groups Command Group Description Page SNMP Configures community access strings and trap managers 7 41 Flash File Manages code image or access point configuration files 7 56 RADIUS Configures the RADIUS client used with 802 1X authentication 7 59 802 1X Authentication Configures 802 1X authentication 7 66 MAC Address Configures MAC address authentication 7 71 Authentication Filtering Filters communications between wireless clients controls access to the 7 74 management interface from wireless clients and filters traf
90. xx xXX XX XX XX multi dash Enter MAC addresses in the form xx xx xx XX XX XxX e no delimiter Enter MAC addresses in the form xxxxxxxxxxxx single dash Enter MAC addresses in the form XXXXXX XXXXXX Default Setting No delimiter Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config radius server radius mac format multi dash SMC AP config radius server vlan format This command sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server Syntax radius server vlan format lt hex ascii gt hex Enter VLAN IDs as a hexadecimal number e ascii Enter VLAN IDs as an ASCII string Default Setting Hex Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config radius server vlan format ascii SMC AP config 7 64 show radius This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show radius Radius Server Information IP 0 0 50 0 Port 1812 Key KKK Retransmit 3 Timeout t Radius MAC format no delimiter Radius VLAN format HEX Key RRR EK Retransmit 3 3 Timeout 7 5 Radius MAC format no delimiter Radius VLAN format HEX RADIUS Client 7 7 65 7 Command Line Interface 802 1X Authentication The access point supports IEEE 802 1X access control for wireless clients This control feature prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802 1X
91. 15 SMC AP Setting the Timeout Interval You can set the timeout interval for web access to the unit after which the user will have to re enter the username and password 6 28 Advanced Configuration 6 Session Timeout for WEB Timeout 0 1800 seconds 300 value 0 is for disable Session Timeout for WEB Sets the time limit for an idle web interface session Range 0 1800 seconds Default 300 seconds 0 is disabled CLI Command for the Web Session Timeout Use the ip http session timeout command from the CLI configuration mode SMC AP config ip http session timeout 0 7 18 SMC AP config Upgrading Firmware You can upgrade new access point software from a local file on the management workstation or from an FTP or TFTP server New software may be provided periodically from your distributor After upgrading new software you must reboot the access point to implement the new code Until a reboot occurs the access point will continue to run the software it was using before the upgrade started Also note that new software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to the factory default settings when first activated after a reboot 6 29 6 System Configuration Firmware Upgrade v4 3 3 9 r Browse Start Upgrade Remote Orr TFTP Start Upgrade It may take several minutes to upgrade the firmware please wait Configuration file bac
92. 2 168 2 2 to 192 168 1 254 6 27 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for AP Management features SMC AP config apmgmtip multiple 192 168 1 50 255 255 255 0 7 21 SMC AP config apmgmtui SNMP enable 7 22 Administration Changing the Password Management access to the web and CLI interface on the access point is controlled through a single user name and password You can also gain additional access security by using control filters see Filter Control on page 6 17 To protect access to the management interface you need to configure an Administrator s user name and password as soon as possible If the user name and password are not configured then anyone having access to the access point may be able to compromise access point and network security Once a new Administrator has been configured you can delete the default admin user name from the system ONE Administration Change Password Username admin Confirm New Password Username The name of the user The default name is admin Length 3 16 characters case sensitive New Password The password for management access Length 3 16 characters case sensitive Confirm New Password Enter the password again for verification CLI Commands for the Administrator s User Name and Password Use the username and password commands from the CLI configuration mode SMC AP config username bob 7 15 SMC AP config password admin 7
93. 35 7 35 software displaying version 6 29 6 88 7 25 downloading 6 31 7 57 specifications C 1 D 1 SSH server Status 6 11 SSID 6 75 7 109 SSL 7 19 STA interface settings 7 88 path cost 7 88 port priority 7 88 startup files setting 7 56 station status 6 91 7 115 status displaying device status 6 88 7 24 displaying station status 6 91 7 115 straight through cable B 2 system clock setting 6 35 7 36 Index system log enabling 6 33 7 30 server 6 33 7 30 system software downloading from server 6 29 7 57 T Telnet for managenet access 7 1 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol See TKIP time zone 6 36 7 37 TKIP 6 81 transmit power configuring 6 59 7 100 trap destination 6 42 7 44 trap manager 6 42 7 44 troubleshooting A 1 U upgrading software 6 29 7 57 user name manager 6 28 7 15 user password 6 28 7 15 V VLAN configuration 6 54 7 135 native ID 6 54 WwW WEP 6 75 configuring 6 75 shared key 6 76 7 124 Wi Fi Multimedia See WMM Wi Fi Protected Access See WPA Wired Equivalent Protection See WEP WPA 6 81 pre shared key 6 84 7 128 WPA pre shared key See PSK Index 3 Model Number SMC2890W AG SMC2891W AG Pub Number 149100034900E TECHNICAL SUPPORT From U S A and Canada 24 hours a day 7 days a week Phn 800 SMC 4 YOU 949 679 8000 Fax 949 502 3400 ENGLISH Technical Support information available at www smc com FRENCH Informations Support Technique sur www smc com DE
94. 42 7 42 configuration settings saving or restoring 6 31 7 57 configuration initial setup 5 1 console port required settings 5 1 country code configuring 5 3 7 12 crossover cable B 3 CSMA CA 1 1 CTS 6 61 7 107 D data rate options C 1 device status displaying 6 88 7 24 DHCP 6 5 7 91 7 92 DNS 6 6 7 91 Domain Name Server See DNS downloading software 6 29 7 57 DTIM 6 60 7 105 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E EAP 6 81 encryption 6 71 6 75 6 81 Ethernet port 1 6 event logs 6 93 6 95 7 33 Extensible Authentication Protocol See EAP F factory defaults restoring 6 31 7 10 filter 6 17 7 71 address 6 12 7 71 between wireless clients 7 75 local bridge 7 75 local or remote 6 12 7 73 management access 6 17 7 75 protocol types 6 18 7 76 VLANs 6 54 7 135 Index 1 Index firmware displaying version 6 30 7 25 upgrading 6 29 6 31 7 57 fragmentation 7 106 G gateway address 5 2 6 6 7 1 7 91 H hardware version displaying 7 25 HTTP secure server 7 20 HTTPS 7 19 IAPP 7 134 IEEE 802 11a 1 1 6 51 7 97 configuring interface 6 53 7 97 maximum data rate 7 99 radio channel 7 100 IEEE 802 11b 6 51 IEEE 802 11f 7 134 IEEE 802 119 6 51 configuring interface 6 68 7 97 maximum data rate 7 99 radio channel 6 69 7 100 IEEE 802 1x 6 81 7 66 7 71 configuring 6 86 7 66 initial setup 5 1 IP address BOOTP DHCP 7 91 7 92 configuring 5 2 6 5 7 91 7 92 L
95. 6 ip ssh server port 7 16 ip telnet server enable 7 17 ip http port 7 17 ip http server 7 18 ip http session timeout 7 18 ip https port 7 19 ip https server 7 19 web redirect 7 20 APmgmtIP 7 21 APmgmtUI 7 22 show apmanagement 7 22 xi Contents show system show version show config show hardware System Logging Commands logging on logging host logging console logging level logging facility type logging clear show logging show event log System Clock Commands sntp server ip sntp server enable sntp server date time sntp server daylight saving sntp server timezone show sntp DHCP Relay Commands dhcp relay enable dhcp relay show dhcp relay SNMP Commands snmp server community snmp server contact snmp server location snmp server enable server snmp server host snmp server trap snmp server engine id snmp server user snmp server targets snmp server filter snmp server filter assignments show snmp groups show snmp users show snmp group assignments show snmp target show snmp filter show snmp filter assignments show snmp Flash File Commands bootfile xii 7 24 7 25 7 25 7 29 7 29 7 30 7 30 7 31 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 33 7 34 7 34 7 35 7 35 7 36 7 37 7 37 7 38 7 39 7 39 7 40 7 40 7 41 7 42 7 42 7 43 7 43 7 44 7 45 7 46 7 47 7 49 7 50 7 51 7 51 7 52 7 52 7 53 7 53 7 54 7 55 7 56 7 56 copy delete dir show boottile RADIUS Client radius server address radius server port rad
96. 80 Port 1812 Key s KKEKKK Retransmit En Timeout z5 Radius MAC format no delimiter Radius VLAN format HEX IP 0 0 0 0 Port 1812 Key ORK KKK Retransmit 3 Timeout 2 5 Radius MAC format no delimiter Radius VLAN format HEX Service State Disable Community ro PKR RRR KK Community rw POR Ok kk Location 3 Contact Contact Engineld 80 00 07 e5 80 00 00 29 6 00 00 00 0c EngineBoots 2 Trap Destinations lis 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 2 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 32 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 7 27 7 Command Line Interface Station Table Information if wireless A VAP 802 11la Channel 0 Auto No 802 11la Channel Stations if wireless G VAP 0 802 11g Channel Auto dotllInterfaceAGFail Enabled dotl1InterfaceBFail dot11StationAssociation Enabled dot11StationAuthentication dot11StationReAssociation Enabled dot11StationRequestFail dotlxAuthFail Enabled dot1xAuthNotInitiated dot1xAuthSuccess Enabled dot1xMacAddrAuthFail dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled iappContextDataSent iappStationRoamedFrom Enabled iappStationRoamedTo localMacAddrAuthFail Enabled localMacAddrAuthSuccess pppLogonFail Enabled sntpServerFail configFileVersionChanged Enabled radiusServerChanged systemDown Enabled systemUp SNTP Information Service State Disabled SNTP server 1 IP 137 92 140 80 SNTP server 2 IP
97. Acknowledge WMM BSS Parameters ACO Best Effort logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 10 AIFSN 3 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 10 AIFSN 7 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC1 Background AC2 Video logCwMin 3 ogCwMax 4 AIFSN 2 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 3 008 ms AC3 Voice logCwMin 2 ogCwMax 3 AIFSN 2 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 1 504 ms WMM AP Parameters ACO Best Effort logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 6 AIFSN 3 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 10 AIFSN 7 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms logCwMin 3 ogCwMax 4 AIFSN 1 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 3 008 ms logCwMin 2 ogCwMax 3 AIFSN 1 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 1 504 ms SMC AP AC1 Background AC2 Video AC3 Voice CLI Commands for WEP over 802 1X Security Use the vap command to access each VAP interface to configure the security settings First set 802 1X to required using the 802 1x command and set the 802 1X key refresh rates Then use the auth command to select open system authentication and the encryption command 6 80 Radio Interface 6 to enable data encryption To view the current security settings use the show interface wireless a 0 3 or show interface wireless g 0 3 command not shown in example SMC AP if wireless g vap 0 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 802 1X required 7 66 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 802 1xX br
98. Antenne ist ihre Hauptantenne F r einige Anwendungen z B Einsatz eines SMC2890W AG AM Ger ts als Bridge Link oder Zugriffspunkt m ssen Sie externe Antennen anbringen und sie an die Br cke anschlie en Typischerweise ben tigt ein Bridge Link eine 5 0 GHz Antenne und ein Zugriffspunkt eine 2 4 GHz Antenne SMC2890W AG AM Ger te die als verwaltete Zugriffspunkte fungieren ben tigen auch eine externe Antenne f r 2 4 GHz Betrieb F hren Sie folgende Schritte aus 1 Montieren Sie die externe Antenne innerhalb eines Abstands von 3 m 10 Fu mit der Halterung die der Antenne mitgeliefert ist an derselben St tzstruktur wie die Bridge 2 Verbinden Sie die Antenne mit dem HF Koaxialkabel welches der Antenne mitgeliefert ist an den Bridge Anschluss Typ N 3 Versiegeln Sie die Antennenanschl sse mit wasserdichtem Klebeband um zu verhindern dass Wasser in die Anschl sse eindringt D 5 D Montieren der Bridge 2 4 GHz Anschluss Typ N Externe 5 GHz gt Antenne mit hoher 7 Verstarkung 5 GHz Anschluss Typ N Externe 2 4 GHz Antenne mit kugelf rmiger Richtcharakteristik HF Koaxialkabel AnschlieBen der Kabel an das Gerat 1 Verbinden Sie das Ethernet Kabel mit dem Ethernet Port der drahtlosen Bridge 2 Umwickeln Sie als zus tzlichen Schutz gegen Regen oder Feuchtigkeit den Ethernet Anschluss mit wasserdichtem Klebeband nicht mit
99. C 7 15 management interface filter uplink enable Ethernet port MAC address filtering GC 7 76 filter uplink Adds or deletes a MAC address from the filtering table GC 7 76 filter ethernet type enable Checks the Ethernet type for all incoming and outgoing GC 7 16 Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table filter ethernet type Sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type GC 7 71 protocol show filters Shows the filter configuration Exec 7 78 7 14 Filtering Commands 7 filter local bridge This command disables communication between wireless clients Use the no form to disable this filtering Syntax filter local bridge lt all VAP intra VAP gt no filter local bridge all VAP When enabled clients cannot establish wireless communications with any other client either those associated to the same VAP interface or any other VAP interface intra VAP When enabled clients associated with a specific VAP interface cannot establish wireless communications with each other Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP interfaces Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command can disable wireless to wireless communications between clients via the access point However it does not affect communications between wireless clients and the wired network Example SMC AP config filter local bridge SMC AP config filter ap manage This command prevents wir
100. Default Setting SMC AP 7 14 System Management Commands 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config system name AP SMC AP config username This command configures the user name for management access Syntax username lt name gt name The name of the user Length 3 16 characters case sensitive Default Setting admin Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config username bob SMC AP config password After initially logging onto the system you should set the password Remember to record it in a safe place Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax password lt password gt no password password Password for management access Length 3 16 characters case sensitive Default Setting smcadmin Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config password SMC AP config 7 15 7 Command Line Interface ip ssh server enable This command enables the Secure Shell server Use the no form to disable the server Syntax ip ssh server enable no ip ssh server Default Setting Interface enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The access point supports Secure Shell version 2 0 only After boot up the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host encryption keys The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being generated The show system comman
101. External N Type External N Type External N Type External Antenna Connector Antenna Connector Antenna Connector Antenna Connector 2 4 GHz 5 GHz 5 GHz 2 4 GHz Right Antenna Right Antenna Left Antenna Left Antenna LED Indicators The access point includes eight status LED indicators as indicated in the following figure 802 11b g Wireless Link Activity f Power WO O O Pond A 10 Link Ethernet N vA Link Activity 802 11a Wireless Link Activity The following table describes the system status LEDs LED Status Description Power On Green Indicates that the system is working normally On Amber Indicates a system reset Link On Green Indicates a valid 10 100 Mbps Ethernet cable link Flashing Green Indicates that the access pointis transmitting or receiving data ona 10 100 Mbps Ethernet LAN Flashing rate is proportional to network activity 1 3 1 Introduction The 11a and 11b g LEDs operate in two display modes which are configurable through the management interface The RSSI mode is for aligning antennas in a bridge link The AP mode is for indicating data traffic rates The following table describes the wireless status LEDs in AP mode LED Status Description lla Off No signal detected or the 802 11a radio is disabled three LEDs Slow Flashing Green The 802 11a radio is enabled with a low level of network activity Fast
102. Fail Enabled dot1xAuthFai Enabled dot1xAuthNotInitiated Enabled dotixAuthSuccess Enabled dot1xMacAddrAuthFail Enabled dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled iappContextDataSent Enabled jappStationRoamedFrom Enabled jappStationRoamedTo Enabled localMacAddrAuthFai Enabled localMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled iappContextDataSent Enabled dot1XSuppAuthenticated Enabled wirelessExternalAntenna Enabled dotllInterfaceAFail Enabled dotiliInterfaceGFail Enabled pppLogonFai Enabled sntpServerFail Enabled configFileVersionChanged Enabled radiusServerChanged Enabled systemDown Enabled systemUp Enabled Enterprise AP 6 45 6 System Configuration Configuring SNMPv3 Users The access point allows up to 10 SNMP v3 users to be configured Each user must be defined by a unique name assigned to one of three pre defined security groups and configured with specific authentication and encryption settings SNMP Users 1 Group Auth Type Passphrase gt Priv Type Passphrase Action New User RO v None None Add 2 User List User The SNMPv3 user name 32 characters maximum Group The SNMPv3 group name Options RO RWAuth or RWPriv Default RO RO Read only access RWaAuth Read write access with user authentication RWPriv Read write access with both user authentication and data encryption Auth Type The authentication type used for the SNMP user either MD5 or none When MDS is selected enter a password in th
103. Hardware Installation Be sure to take account of the antenna polarization direction all antennas in a link must be mounted with the same polarization Mounting to a Wall Perform the following steps to mount the unit to a wall using the wall mounting bracket Note The wall mounting bracket does not allow the wireless bridge s intrgrated antenna to be aligned It is intended for use with the unit using external antennas 1 Attach the bracket to a wall with flat side flush against the wall see following figure Position the bracket in the intended location and mark the position of the four mounting screw holes 2 Drill four holes in the wall that match the screws and wall plugs included in the bracket kit then secure the bracket to the wall 3 Attach the square mounting plate to the bridge with the supplied screws 4 Use the included nuts to tightly secure the wireless bridge to the bracket 4 4 Connect External Antennas 4 Connect External Antennas When deploying a SMC2891W AG unit for a bridge link or access point operation you need to mount external antennas and connect them to the bridge Typically a bridge link requires a 5 GHz antenna and access point operation a 2 4 GHz antenna SMC2890W AG units also require an external antenna for 2 4 GHz operation Perform these steps 1 Mount the external antenna to the same supporting structure as the bridge within 3 m 10 ft distance using the br
104. Information Local Bridge Traffic among all client STAs blocked AP Management ENABLED Ethernet Type Filter DISABLED UPlink Access Table UPlink access control Enabled UPlink MAC access control list 00 12 34 56 78 9a SMC AP WDS Bridge Commands The commands described in this section are used to set the operation mode for each access point interface and configure Wireless Distribution System WDS forwarding table settings Command Function Mode Page bridge mode Selects Master or Slave mode IC W 7 79 bridge role Selects the bridge operation mode for a radio interface IC W 7 79 bridge channel auto sync Automatically finds the parent bridge operating IC W 7 80 channel bridge link parent Configures the MAC addresses of the parent bridge 1IC W 7 80 node bridge link child Configures MAC addresses of connected child bridge IC W 7 81 nodes bridge dynamic entry Sets the aging time for dynamic entries inthe WDS GC 7 82 age time forwarding table show bridge aging time Displays the current WDS forwarding table aging time Exec 7 82 show bridge filter entry Pip eys current entries in the bridge MAC address Exec 7 83 e 7 18 WDS Bridge Commands 7 bridge mode This command selects between Master and Slave mode Syntax bridge mode lt master slave gt master Operates as a master enabling up to five slave links slave Operates as a slave with onl
105. Integrity Protocol TKIP WPA specifies TKIP as the data encryption method to replace WEP TKIP avoids the problems of WEP static keys by dynamically changing data encryption keys Basically TKIP starts with a master temporal key for each user session and then mathematically generates other keys to encrypt each data packet TKIP provides further data encryption enhancements by including a message integrity check for each packet and a re keying mechanism which periodically changes the master key WPA Pre Shared Key Mode WPA PSK WPA2 PSk For enterprise deployment WPA requires a RADIUS authentication server to be configured on the wired network However for small office networks that may not have the resources to configure and maintain a RADIUS server WPA provides a simple operating mode that uses just a pre shared password for network access The Pre Shared Key mode uses a common password for user authentication that is manually entered on 6 81 6 System Configuration the access point and all wireless clients The PSK mode uses the same TKIP packet encryption and key management as WPA in the enterprise providing a robust and manageable alternative for small networks Mixed WPA and WEP Client Support WPA enables the access point to indicate its supported encryption and authentication mechanisms to clients using its beacon signal WPA compatible clients can likewise respond to indicate their WPA support This enables the access point to
106. Keys Authentication Type 802 1x Broadcast Key Refresh Rate Session Key Refresh Rate 802 1x Session Timeout Value Antenna Control method Antenna ID Antenna Location Identification 0 Enterprise 802 1la Access Point VAP_TEST_11A 0 DISABLED 36 AUTO DISABLED 00 12 0f 05 95 0 FULL 16 dBm 54Mbps 6Mbps 2346 bytes 2347 bytes 100 TUs 60 Mins 30 Mins 1 beacon 64 stations Software Disabled Disabled WEP TKIP and AES PRE SHARED KEY PASSPHRASE DISABLED 1 Key 1 Key 3 OPEN EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY Key 2 Key 4 Diversity 0x0000 Default Antenna Indoor S 173 6 67 6 System Configuration a ei E Quality of Service WMM Mode SUPPORTED WMM Acknowledge Policy ACO Best Effort Ack AC1 Background Acknowledge AC2 Video Acknowledge AC3 Voice Acknowledge WMM BSS Parameters ACO Best Effort logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 10 AIFSN 3 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC1 Background logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 10 AIFSN 7 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC2 Video logCwMin 3 ogCwMax 4 AIFSN 2 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 3 008 ms AC3 Voice logCwMin 2 ogCwMax 3 AIFSN 2 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 1 504 ms WMM AP Parameters ACO Best Effort logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 6 AIFSN 3 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC1 Background logCwMin 4 ogCwMax 10 AIFSN 7 Ad
107. MAC RADIUS Combination Authentication Server No encryption and no Interface Detail Settings Local RADIUS Yes3 authentication Authentication Open System or Disabled Encryption Disable 802 1x Disable Static WEP only with Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys Local RADIUS Yes or without shared key Selecta WEP transmit key for the interface or Disabled authentication Interface Detail Settings Authentication Shared Key or Open System Encryption Enable 802 1x Disable 6 72 Radio Interface 6 Table 6 3 Security Combinations Client Security Combination Configuration Summary MAC Authentication RADIUS Server Dynamic WEP 802 1x only Interface Detail Settings Authentication Open System Encryption Enable 802 1x Required Set 802 1x key refresh and reauthentication rates Local RADIUS or Disabled Yes 802 1x WPA only Interface Detail Settings Authentication WPA Encryption Enable WPA Configuration Required Cipher Suite TKIP 802 1x Required Set 802 1x key refresh and reauthentication rates Local only WPA Pre Shared Key only Interface Detail Settings Authentication WPA PSK Encryption Enable WPA Configuration R equired Cipher Configuration TKIP 802 1x Disable WPA Pre shared Key Type Hexadicmal or Alphanumeric Enter a WPA Pre shared key Local only Static and dynamic 802 1x WEP keys Enter 1 to 4 WEP keys Selecta WEP
108. MC2890W AG unit which acts as the Master in the wireless bridge network Other SMC2891W AG units support only one WDS link which must be to the network s master unit The unit supports WDS bridge links on either the 5 GHz 802 11a or 2 4 GHz 802 11b g bands and can be used with various external antennas to offer flexible deployment options Note The external antennas offer longer range options using the 5 GHz radio which makes this interface more suitable for bridge links The 2 4GHz radio has various types of antenna options but the 8dBi omnidirectional antenna is better suited for local access point services When using WDS on a radio band only wireless bridge units can associate to each other Wireless clients can only associate with the wireless bridge using a radio band set to access point mode Point to Point Configuration Two SMC2891W AG bridges can form a wireless point to point link using their integrated 5 GHz 802 11a antennas A point to point configuration can provide a limited data rate 6 Mbps link over a long range up to 15 4 km or a high data rate 108 Mbps over a short range 1 3 km SMC2891W AG SMC2891W AG up LAN LAN 2 4 Bridge Link Topologies 2 Point to Multipoint Configuration A SMC2890W AG wireless bridge can use an omnidirectional or sector antenna to connect to as many as 6 bridges in a point to multipoint configuration There can only be one Master unit in the wireless bridg
109. MP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent A defined set of variables known as managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent SNMP defines both the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The access point includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 clients This agent continuously monitors the status of the access point as well as the traffic passing to and from wireless clients A network management station can access this information using SNMP management software that is compliant with MIB II To implement SNMP management the access point must first have an IP address and subnet mask configured either manually or dynamically Access to the onboard agent using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings To communicate with the access point the management station mu
110. P config snmp server user User Name lt 1 32 gt chris Group Name lt 1 32 gt RWPriv Authtype md5 lt cr gt none md5 Passphrase lt 8 32 gt a good secret Privacy des lt cr gt none des Passphrase lt 8 32 gt a very good secret Enterprise AP config exit Enterprise AP show snmp users 7 52 T A N UserName chris GroupName RWPriv AuthType MD5 Passphrase xx KKK KKK KK PrivType DES Passphrase xx eww KK Enterprise AP show snmp group assignments 7 52 GroupName RWPriv UserName chris Enterprise AP 6 47 6 System Configuration Configuring SNMPv3 Trap Filters SNMP v3 users can be configured to receive notification messages from the access point An SNMP Target ID is created that specifies the SNMP v3 user IP address and UDP port A user defined notification filter can be created so that specific notifications can be prevented from being sent to particular targets The access point allows up to 10 notification filters to be created Each filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB subtree ID entries To configure a new notification filter click the New button A new page opens to configure the filter see below To edit an existing filter select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then click the Edit button To delete a filter select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then click the Delete button if SNMP Trap Filters New Edi Delete 2e
111. PASSPHRASE EMPTY 720 minutes ENABLED 1 Key 1 EMPTY Key 3 EMPTY DISABLED SHARED EMPTY EMPTY Key 2 Key 4 7 113 7 Command Line Interface SSeS G02 k Ss Se SoS HS SS SS SS 802 1x DISABLED Broadcast Key Refresh Rate 30 min Session Key Refresh Rate 30 min 802 1x Session Timeout Value 0 min SS Antenna re Antenna Control method Diversity Antenna ID 0x0000 Default Antenna Antenna Location Indoor ssa ay SSS Seas Quality of Service a WMM Mode SUPPORTED WMM Acknowledge Policy ACO Best Effort Acknowledge AC1 Background Acknowledge AC2 Video Acknowledge AC3 Voice Acknowledge WMM BSS Parameters ACO Best Effort logCwMin 4 logCwMax 10 AIFSN 3 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC1 Background logCwMin 4 logCwMax 10 AIFSN 7 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC2 Video logCwMin 3 logCwMax 4 AIFSN 2 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 3 008 ms AC3 Voice logCwMin 2 logCwMax 3 AIFSN 2 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 1 504 ms WMM AP Parameters ACO Best Effort logCwMin 4 logCwMax 6 AIFSN 3 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC1 Background logCwMin 4 logCwMax 10 AIFSN 7 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC2 Video logCwMin 3 logCwMax 4 AIFSN 1 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 3 008 ms AC3 Voice logCwMin 2 logCwMax 3 AIFSN 1 Admission Control No T
112. PC users and an access point that is directly connected to the wired LAN Each wireless PC in a BSS can connect to any computer in its wireless group or access other computers or network resources in the wired LAN infrastructure through the access point The infrastructure configuration not only extends the accessibility of wireless PCs to the wired LAN but also increases the effective wireless transmission range for wireless PCs by passing their signals through one or more access points A wireless infrastructure can be used for access to a central database or for connection between mobile workers as shown in the following figure 1 Wired LAN Extension to Wireless Clients Di ii Server Desktop eee Switch get AE S an BT Access Point U a Notebook Pc E Desktop PC 2 2 Access Point Topologies 2 Infrastructure Wireless LAN for Roaming Wireless PCs The Basic Service Set BSS defines the communications domain for each access point and its associated wireless clients The BSS ID is a 48 bit binary number based on the access point s wireless MAC address and is set automatically and transparently as clients associate with the access point The BSS ID is used in frames sent between the access point and its clients to identify traffic in the service area The BSS ID is only set by the access point never by its clients The clients only need to set the Service Set Identifier SSID that identifies the ser
113. Sicherheitsanweisungen durchlesen Germany WARNUNG Die Installation und der Ausbau des Ger ts darf nur durch Fachpersonal erfolgen Das Ger t sollte nicht an eine ungeerdete Wechselstromsteckdose angeschlossen werden Das Ger t mu an eine geerdete Steckdose angeschlossen werden welche die internationalen Sicherheitsnormen erf llt Der Ger testecker der Anschlu an das Ger t nicht der Wandsteckdosenstecker mu einen gem EN 60320 IEC 320 konfigurierten Ger teeingang haben Die Netzsteckdose mu in der N he des Ger ts und leicht zug nglich sein Die Stromversorgung des Ger ts kann nur durch Herausziehen des Ger tenetzkabels aus der Netzsteckdose unterbrochen werden Der Betrieb dieses Ger ts erfolgt unter den SELV Bedingungen Sicherheitskleinstspannung gem IEC 60950 Diese Bedingungen sind nur gegeben wenn auch die an das Ger t angeschlossenen Ger te unter SELV Bedingungen betrieben werden vii Stromkabel Dies muss von dem Land in dem es benutzt wird gepr ft werden U S A und Canada Der Cord mu das UL gepruft und war das CSA beglaubigt Das Minimum spezifikation fur der Cord sind Nu 18 AWG nicht mehr als 2 meter oder 16 AWG Der typ SV oder SJ 3 Leiter Der Cord mu haben eine strombelastbarkeit aus wenigstens 10A Dieser Stromstecker mu hat einer erdschluss mit der typ NEMA 5 15P 15A 125V oder NEMA 6 15P 15A 250V konfiguration
114. UTSCH Technischer Support und weitere Information unter www smc com SPANISH En www smc com Ud podr encontrar la informaci n relativa a servicios de soporte t cnico DUTCH Technische ondersteuningsinformatie beschikbaar op www smc com PORTUGUES Informa es sobre Suporte T cnico em www smc com SWEDISH Information om Teknisk Support finns tillgangligt pa www smc com INTERNET E mail address techsupport smc com Driver updates http www smc com index cfm action tech_support_drivers_downloads World Wide Web http www smc com 20 Mason Irvine CA 92618 Phn 949 679 8000 www smc com
115. When you click on the New button in the SNMP Trap Filters page a new page opens where the filter parameters are configured Define a filter name and subtree ID to be filtered Select the filter type include or exclude from the drop down list Click Apply to create the filter SNMP Notification New Filter Exclude eee To add more subtree IDs to the filter return to the SNMP Trap Filters page and click the Edit button In the Edit page click the New button to access the Add SNMP Notification Subtree page and configure a new subtree ID to be filtered Note Only the New Filter page allows the Filter ID to be configured 6 48 SNMP 6 SNMP Notification Filter New Delete Filter ID trapfilter1 Type Subtree C INCLUDE 1 D0 Filter ID A user defined name that identifies the filter Maximum length 32 characters Subtree OID Specifies MIB subtree to be filtered The MIB subtree must be un defined in the form 1 3 6 1 and always start with a Filter Type Indicates if the filter is to include or exclude the MIB subtree objects from the filter Note that MIB objects included in the filter are not sent to the receiving target and objects excluded are sent By default all traps are sent so you can first use an include filter entry for all trap objects Then use exclude entries for the required trap objects to send to the target Note that the filter entries are appl
116. XOP Limit 1 504 ms SMC AP 7 114 show station Wireless Interface Commands 7 This command shows the wireless clients associated with the access point Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show station Station Table Information if wireless A VAP 802 11la Channel 0 60 No 802 1la Channel Stations if wireless G VAP 0 802 11g Channel L 802 11g Channel Station Table Station Address 00 04 23 Authenticated Associated F TRUE FALSE F Counters pkts Tx Rx 20 Time Associated LastAssoc 0 0 if wireless G VAP 802 11g Channel 1 1 No 802 11g Channel Stations SMC AP 94 9A 9C VLAN ID 0 orwarding KeyType ALSE NONE bytes Tx Rx 0 721 0 LastDisAssoc LastAuth 0 0 7 115 7 Command Line Interface Rogue AP Detection Commands A rogue AP is either an access point that is not authorized to participate in the wireless network or an access point that does not have the correct security configuration Rogue APs can potentially allow unauthorized users access to the network Alternatively client stations may mistakenly associate to a rogue AP and be prevented from accessing network resources Rogue APs may also cause radio interference and degrade the wireless LAN performance The access point can be configured to periodically scan all radio channels and find other access points within range A database of nearby access points is maintained where any rogue
117. a packets without a priority tag are always added to the Best Effort AC queue From the four queues an internal virtual collision resolution mechanism first selects data with the highest priority to be granted a transmit opportunity Then the same collision resolution mechanism is used externally to determine which device has access to the wireless medium For each AC queue the collision resolution mechanism is dependent on two timing parameters AIFSN Arbitration Inter Frame Space Number a number used to calculate the minimum time between data frames CW Contention Window a number used to calculate a random backoff time After a collision detection a backoff wait time is calculated The total wait time is the sum of a minimum wait time Arbitration Inter Frame Space or AIFS determined from the AIFSN and a random backoff time calculated from a value selected from zero to the CW The CW value varies within a configurable range It starts at CWMin and doubles after every collision up to a maximum value CWMax After a successful transmission the CW value is reset to its CWMin value 6 63 6 System Configuration iority Random Backoff Minimum Wait Time Random Wait Time CWMin Random Backoff iority Random Wait Time Minimum Wait Time Figure 6 1 WMM Backoff Wait Times For high priority traffic the AIFSN and CW values are smaller The smaller values equate to less bac
118. accurate alignment you must monitor the signal strength LEDs as the antenna moves horizontally and vertically e Point to Multipoint Configurations In a point to multipoint configuration all bridge nodes must be aligned with the root bridge antenna The alignment process is the same as in point to point links but only the bridge node end of the link requires the alignment 4 8 Align Antennas 4 The signal strength LEDs indicate the received radio signal strength for a particular bridge link The more LEDs that turn on the stronger the signal Alternatively you can monitor the Receive Signal Strength Indicator RSSI value directly from the management interface The higher the RSSI value the stronger the signal When you move the antenna during alignment the radio signal from the remote antenna can be seen to have a strong central main lobe and smaller side lobes The object of the alignment process is to set the antenna so that it is receiving the strongest signal from the central main lobe AVertical Scan Remote x I io Antenna Ton Horizontal Scan i Maximum Signal I1 gt Strength Position for i a 3 Vertical Alignment sake Ssg i p Seager M Main Lobe Maximum gt RSSI Value RSSI Value Side Lobe 4 Maximum Maximum Signal Strength Position for Horizontal Alignment To align the antennas in the link monitor the signal strength LEDs or the RSSI value in
119. acket supplied in the antenna package 2 Connect the antenna to the bridge s N type connector using the RF coaxial cable provided in the antenna package Some omnidirectional external antennas attach directly to an N type connector without using a coaxial cable 3 Apply weatherproofing tape to the antenna connectors to help prevent water entering the connectors 4 Set the antenna option for the corresponding antenna through the user interface See Antenna ID on page 6 59 and Antenna Control Method on page 6 59 4 5 4 Hardware Installation 2 4 GHz N type Connector 5 GHz External gt High gain Panel Antenna I 5 GHz N type Connector 2 4 GHz External Omnidirectional Antenna RF Coaxial Cable Connect Cables to the Unit Warning Do not connect or disconnect cables or otherwise work with the bridge during periods of lightning activity 1 Attach the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the wireless bridge 2 For extra protection against rain or moisture apply weatherproofing tape not included around the Ethernet connector 3 Be sure to ground the unit with an appropriate grounding wire not included by attaching it to the grounding point on the base of the unit using the screw provided in the package Caution Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets local and national electrical codes For additiona
120. adius server vlan format on page 7 64 Note The specific configuration of RADIUS server software is beyond the scope of this guide Refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS server software Home A i VLAN Configuration VLAN Classification Disable Enable Native VLAN ID 1 VLAN Classification Enables or disables VLAN tagging support on the access point Native VLAN ID The VLAN ID that traffic must have to be able to manage the access point Range 1 4094 Default 1 6 20 Advanced Configuration 6 WDS Seitings Each access point radio interface can be configured to operate in a bridge or repeater mode which allows it to forward traffic directly to other access point units To set up bridge links between access point units you must configure the wireless Distribution System WDS forwarding table by specifying the wireless MAC address of all units to which you want to forward traffic Up to six WDS bridge or repeater links can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network The Spanning Tree Protocol STP can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between bridges This allows a wireless bridge to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes do
121. amic Will use turbo mode when no other nearby access points are detected or active Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless 802 11a 7 98 Wireless Interface Commands 7 Command Usage The normal 802 11a wireless operation mode provides connections up to 54 Mbps Turbo Mode is an enhanced mode not regulated in IEEE 802 11a that provides a higher data rate of up to 108 Mbps Enabling Turbo Mode allows the access point to provide connections up to 108 Mbps In normal mode the access point provides a channel bandwidth of 20 MHz and supports the maximum number of channels permitted by local regulations e g 11 channels for the United States In Turbo Mode the channel bandwidth is increased to 40 MHz to support the increased data rate However this reduces the number of channels supported e g 5 channels for the United States Example SMC AP if wireless a turbo SMC AP if wireless a multicast data rate This command configures the maximum data rate at which the access point transmits multicast and management packets excluding beacon packets on the wireless interface Syntax multicast data rate lt speed gt speed Maximum transmit speed allowed for multicast data Options for 802 11a 6 12 24 Mbps Options for 802 11b g 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps Default Setting 1 Mbps for 802 11b g 6 Mbps for 802 11a Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Exa
122. an entry from the table use the address filter delete command To display the current settings use the show authentication command from the Exec mode SMC AP config mac authentication server local 7 73 SMC AP config mac authentication session timeout 5 7 73 SMC AP config web redirect 7 20 SMC AP config address filter default denied 7 71 SMC AP config address filter entry 00 70 50 cc 99 1la denied 7 72 SMC AP config address filter entry 00 70 50 cc 99 1b allowed SMC AP config address filter entry 00 70 50 cc 99 1c allowed SMC AP config address filter delete 00 70 50 cc 99 1c 7 72 SMC AP config exit SMC AP show authentication 7 69 Authentication Information MAC Authentication Server LOCAL MAC Auth Session Timeout Value 0 min 802 1x supplicant DISABLED 802 1x supplicant user EMPTY 802 1x supplicant password EMPTY Address Filtering DENIED System Default ALLOW addresses not found in filter table Filter Table MAC Address Status 00 70 50 cc 99 la DENIED 00 70 50 cc 99 1b ALLOWED SMC AP 6 15 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for RADIUS MAC Authentication Use the mac authentication server command from the global configuration mode to enable remote MAC authentication Set the timeout value for re authentication using the mac authentication session timeout command Be sure to also configure connection settings for the RADIUS server not shown in the following example
123. an optional external antenna that is connected to the right antenna connector e Left The radio uses a single antenna on the left side Select this method when using an optional external antenna that is connected to the left antenna connector Also select this method when using the integrated 5 GHz antenna Antenna Location Selects the mounting location of the antenna in use either Indoor or Outdoor Selecting the correct location ensures that the access point only uses radio channels that are permitted in the country of operation Default Indoor MIC Mode The Michael Integrity Check MIC is part of the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP encryption used in Wi Fi Protected Access WPA security The MIC calculation is performed in the access point for each transmitted packet and this can impact throughput and performance The access point supports a choice of software or hardware MIC calculation The performance of the access point can be improved by selecting the best method for the specific deployment Default Software Hardware Provides best performance when the number of supported clients is less than 27 Software Provides the best performance for a large number of clients on one radio interface Throughput may be reduced when both 802 11a and 802 1 1g interfaces are supporting a high number of clients simultaneously Super A The Atheros proprietary Super A performance enhancements are supported by t
124. and the default password is smcadmin When the user name is entered the CLI displays the SMC AP prompt 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays Username admin Password SMC AP Caution Command examples shown later in this chapter abbreviate the console prompt to AP for simplicity Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example if the access point cannot acquire an IP address from a DHCP server the default IP address used by the access point 192 168 2 2 consists of a network portion 192 168 2 and a host portion 2 To access the access point through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the access point and set the default gateway if you are managing the access point from a different IP subnet For example AP configure AP config interface ethernet AP if ethernet ip address 10 1 0 1 255 255 255 0 10 1 0 254 AP if ethernet 7 1 7 Command Line Interface If your corporate network is connected to
125. apping of the four ACs to 802 1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate inter operability with other wired network QoS policies While the four ACs are specified for specific 6 62 Radio Interface 6 types of traffic WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any network wide QoS policy WMM also specifies a protocol that access points can use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to QoS enabled wireless clients Table 6 1 WMM Access Categories Access Category WMM Designation Description 802 1D Tags AC_VO AC3 Voice Highest priority minimum delay Time sensitive 7 6 data such as VoIP Voice over IP calls AC_VI AC2 Video High priority minimum delay Time sensitive data 5 4 such as streaming video AC_BE ACO BestE ffort Normal priority medium delay and throughput 0 3 Data only affected by long delays Data from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities AC_BK AC1 Background Lowest priority Data with no delay or throughput 2 1 requirements such as bulk data transfers WMM Operation WMM uses traffic priority based on the four ACs Voice Video Best Effort and Background The higher the AC priority the higher the probability that data is transmitted When the access point forwards traffic WMM adds data packets to four independent transmit queues one for each AC depending on the 802 1D priority tag of the packet Dat
126. ary RADIUS servers The following example configures the settings for the primary RADIUS server Configure the other parameters for the RADIUS server Then use the show show radius command from the Exec mode to display the current settings for the primary and secondary RADIUS servers SMC AP config radius server port 181 SMC AP config radius server key green SMC AP config radius server timeout 10 SMC AP config radius server retransmit 5 SMC AP config exit SMC AP show radius Radius Server Information IP z 192 168 1 25 Port 181 Key 2 RRR RK Retransmit 5 Timeout 10 Radius MAC format no delimiter Radius VLAN format HEX IP 0 0 0 0 Port 1812 Key Pa RRR RK Retransmit 23 Timeout 75 Radius MAC format no delimiter Radius VLAN format HEX SMC AP SMC AP config radius server address 192 168 1 25 Enterprise AP config radius server port accounting 1813 Enterprise AP config radius server timeout interim 500 7 60 7 61 7 61 7 62 7 62 7 63 7 63 6 10 Advanced Configuration 6 SSH Settings Telnet is a remote management tool that can be used to configure the access point from anywhere in the network However Telnet is not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH can act as a secure replacement for Telnet The SSH protocol uses generated public keys to encrypt all data transfers passing between the access point and SSH enabled management station clien
127. atic 00 30 f1 f0 9b 26 1 0 1 300 300 Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 27 1 0 1 300 300 Static 00 30 f1 2f be 30 1 3 0 300 175 Dynamic 00 30 1 0 9a 9c 1 0 1 300 300 Static EC hi te EE LE TE 0 4 4095 300 300 Static show bridge link This command displays WDS bridge link and spanning tree settings for specified interfaces Syntax show bridge link lt ethernet wireless lt a g gt index gt e ethernet Specifies the Ethernet interface e wireless Specifies a wireless interface a The 802 11a radio interface g The 802 119 radio interface index The index number of a bridge link Range 1 6 Command Mode Exec 7 83 7 Command Line Interface Example SMC AP show bridge link wireless a Interface Wireless A WDS Information AP Role Bridge Channel Auto Sync Disable Parent 00 12 34 56 78 9a Child Child 2 00 08 12 34 56 de Child 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 Child 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 Child 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 Child 6 00 00 00 00 00 00 STAs No WDS Stations SMC AP SMC AP show bridge link wireless a 2 Port No se A status Enabled state Disabled priority 0 path cost 3 19 message age Timer Inactive message age 4469 designated root priority 32768 MAC 00 30 F1 F0 9A 9C designated cost 0 designated bridge priority 32768 MAC 00 30 F1 F0 9A 9C designated port priority 0 port No 11 forward transitions 0 SMC AP SMC AP show bridge link ethernet
128. ation operation Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 23 characters Default Setting Host Address None Community String public Command Mode Global Configuration 7 44 SNMP Commands 7 Command Usage The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable server command to enable SNMP notifications Example SMC AP config snmp server host 1 10 1 19 23 batman SMC AP config Related Commands snmp server enable server 7 43 snmp server trap This command enables the access point to send specific SNMP traps i e notifications Use the no form to disable specific trap messages Syntax snmp server trap lt trap gt no snmp server trap lt trap gt e trap One of the following SNMP trap messages doti1InterfaceAGFail The 802 11a or 802 119 interface has failed doti1InterfaceBFail The 802 11b interface has failed doti1StationAssociation A client station has successfully associated with the access point doti1StationAuthentication A client station has been successfully authenticated doti1StationReAssociation A client station has successfully re associated with the access point dot11StationRequestFail A client station has failed association re association or
129. ation process is time consuming and can disrupt applications running over the network WPA2 includes a mechanism known as pre authentication that allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated The first time a client is authenticated to a wireless network it has to be fully authenticated When the client is about to roam to another access point in the network the access point sends pre authentication messages to the new access point that include the client s security association information Then when the client sends an association request to the new access point the client is known to be already authenticated so it proceeds directly to key exchange and association To configure WPA click Security under Radio A or Radio G Select one of the VAP interfaces by clicking More Select one of the WPA options in the Authentication Setup table and then configure the parameters displayed beneath the table 5 Security Ei Encryption Disable Enable E Pre Authentication Disable Enable E Authentication Setup eml er ER Own on ai Own Owe es EIER Oman Pre Sen E WPA Configuration Supported Mobile Unit may have WPA enabled to access AP Required Mobile Unit must have WPA enabled to access AP H Cipher Suite WEP Use WEP as cipher suite TKIP Use TKIP as cipher suite AES CCMP Use AES CCMP as cipher suite 6 83 6 System Configuration The WPA configuration parameters are described below Enc
130. ault To provide more security for management access to the access point specific interfaces can be disabled and management restricted to a single IP address or a limited range of IP addresses Once you specify an IP address or range of addresses access to management interfaces is restricted to the specified addresses If anyone tries to access a management interface from an unauthorized address the access point will reject the connection i AP Management UI Management Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable IP Management Any IP Allow any IP address to access device Single IP Specify one IP address to access device Multiple IP Specify multiple IP address to access device 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 ee UI Management Enables or disables management access through Telnet the Web HTTP or SNMP interfaces Default Enabled Note Secure Web HTTPS connections are not affected by the Ul Management or IP Management settings IP Management Restricts management access to Telnet Web and SNMP interfaces to specified IP addresses Default Any IP Any IP Indicates that any IP address is allowed management access e Single IP Specifies a single IP address that is allowed management access e Multiple IP Specifies an address range as defined by the entered IP address and subnet mask For example IP address 192 168 1 6 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 defines all IP addresses from 19
131. authentication dotixAuthFail A 802 1X client station has failed RADIUS authentication dotixAuthNotlnitiated A client station did not initiate 802 1X authentication dotixAuthSuccess A 802 1X client station has been successfully authenticated by the RADIUS server dotixMacAddrAuthFail A client station has failed MAC address authentication with the RADIUS server dotixMacAddrAuthSuccess A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the RADIUS server jappContextDataSent A client station s Context Data has been sent to another access point with which the station has associated jappStationRoamedFrom A client station has roamed from another access point identified by its IP address 7 45 7 Command Line Interface jappStationRoamedTo A client station has roamed to another access point identified by its IP address localMacAddrAuthFail A client station has failed authentication with the local MAC address database on the access point localMacAddrAuthSuccess A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the local database on the access point pppLogonFail The access point has failed to log onto the PPPoE server using the configured user name and password sntpServerFail The access point has failed to set the time from the configured SNTP server sysConfigFileVersionChanged The access point s configuration file has been changed
132. band Taiwan 5 725 5 825 GHz high band Taiwan 802 11b 2 4 2 4835 GHz US Canada ETSI 2 4 2 497 GHz Japan 2 400 2 4835 GHz Taiwan AC Power Adapter Input 100 240 AC 50 60 Hz Output 48 VDC 1 2 A Power consumption 13 2 watts Unit Power Supply PoE input 48 VDC 0 6 A maximum Power consumption 28 watts maximum Physical Size 19 5 x 19 x 7 4 cm 7 68 x 7 48 x 2 91 in Weight 1 54 kg 3 4 Ibs LED Indicators PWR Power Link Ethernet Link Activity 11a and 11g Wireless Link Activity Network Management Web browser RS232 console Telnet SSH SNMP Temperature Operating 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F non condensing 5 to 50 C Storage 55 to 80 C 67 to 176 F non condensing 5 to 70 C Humidity 15 to 95 non condensing Safety UL CUL CSA60950 1 UL60950 1 CB IEC 60950 1 UL GS EN60950 1 C 2 General Specifications C Wireless Radio Regulatory Certification ETSI 300 328 11b g 301 893 11a Full range 301 489 DC power FCC Part 15C 15 247 15 207 11b g Part 15E 15 407 11a Full range Wi Fi DGT TELEC RSS210 Canada C Tick Electromagnetic Compatibility CE Class B EN55022 CE EN55024 IEC61000 3 2 IEC61000 3 3 IEC61000 4 2 IEC61000 4 3 IEC61000 4 4 IEC61000 4 5 IEC61000 4 6 IEC61000 4 8 IEC61000 4 11 FCC Class B Part 15 VCCI Class B ICES 003 Canada Standards IEEE 802 3 10BASE T IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX IEEE 802 11a b g C 3 C Specifications
133. based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Encryption Data passing between the access point and clients can use encryption to protect from interception and evesdropping Extended Service Set ESS More than one wireless cell can be configured with the same Service Set Identifier to allow mobile users can roam between different cells with the Extended Service Set Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP An authentication protocol used to authenticate network clients EAP is combined with IEEE 802 1X port authentication and a RADIUS authentication server to provide mutual authentication between a client the access point and the a RADIUS server Ethernet A popular local area data communications network which accepts transmission from computers and terminals File Transfer Protocol FTP A TCP IP protocol used for file transfer Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP HTTP is a standard used to transmit and receive all data over the World Wide Web IEEE 802 11a A wireless standard that supports high speed communications in the 5 GHz band using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM The standard supports data rates of 6 12 24 and 54 Mbps Glossary 2 G lossary IEEE 802 11b A wireless standard that supports wireless communications in the 2 4 GHz band using Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS
134. be a radio link but the quality and strength of the signal will be affected Calculating the maximum clearance from objects on a path is important as it directly affects the decision on antenna placement and height It is especially critical for long distance links where the radio signal could easily be lost When planning the radio path for a wireless bridge link consider these factors e Avoid any partial line of sight between the antennas e Be cautious of trees or other foliage that may be near the path or may grow and obstruct the path e Be sure there is enough clearance from buildings and that no building construction may eventually block the path e Check the topology of the land between the antennas using topographical maps aerial photos or even satellite image data software packages are available that may include this information for your area e Avoid a path that may incur temporary blockage due to the movement of cars trains or aircraft Antenna Height A reliable wireless link is usually best achieved by mounting the antennas at each end high enough for a clear radio line of sight between them The minimum height required depends on the distance of the link obstacles that may be in the path topology of the terrain and the curvature of the earth for links over 3 miles For long distance links a mast or pole may need to be contsructed to attain the minimum required height Use the following table to estimate the requ
135. be near to the unit and easily accessible You can only remove power from the unit by disconnecting the power cord from the outlet This unit operates under SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage conditions according to IEC 60950 The conditions are only maintained if the equipment to which it is connected also operates under SELV conditions France and Peru only This unit cannot be powered from IT supplies If your supplies are of IT type this unit must be powered by 230 V 2P T via an isolation transformer ratio 1 1 with the secondary connection point labelled Neutral connected directly to earth ground t Imp dance la terre Important Before making connections make sure you have the correct cord set Check it read the label on the cable against the following Power Cord Set U S A and The cord set must be UL approved and CSA certified Canada The minimum specifications for the flexible cord are No 18 AWG not longer than 2 meters or 16 AWG Type SV or SJ 3 conductor The cord set must have a rated current capacity of at least 10 A The attachment plug must be an earth grounding type with NEMA 5 15P 15 A 125 V or NEMA 6 15P 15 A 250 V configuration Denmark The supply plug must comply with Section 107 2 D1 Standard DK2 1a or DK2 5a Switzerland The supply plug must comply with SEV ASE 1011 U K The supply plug must comply with BS1363 3 pin 13 A and be fitted with a 5 A fuse wh
136. ble C 6 Transmit Power 802 11b IEEE 802 11b Maximum Output Power GHz dBm Data Rate 2 412 2 417 2 467 2 472 1 Mbps 20 20 20 2 Mbps 20 20 20 5 5 Mbps 20 20 20 11 Mbps 20 20 20 C 5 C Specifications C 6 Appendix D Montieren der Bridge Die Bridge kann auf folgenden Oberflachentypen montiert werden e Mast Wand oder elektrischer Kasten NEMA Enclosure Achtung Die Bridge darf nur im Freien verwendet werden Installieren Sie die Bridge nicht in Innenraumen Verwenden der Halterung fur Mastmontage Montieren Sie das Gerat anhand folgender Schritte mit der Montagehalterung an einen Stahlmast oder eine Stahlr hre mit einem Durchmesser von 1 5 bis 2 Zoll 1 Befestigen Sie die Halterung immer so an einen Mast dass das offene Ende der Montagerillen nach oben weist 2 Legen Sie den V f rmigen Teil der Halterung um den Mast und ziehen Sie die Befestigungsmuttern gerade so fest an dass sie die Halterung am Mast festhalten Die Halterung muss w hrend der Ausrichtung eventuell um den Mast herumgezogen werden V f rmige Halterung D 1 D Montieren der Bridge 3 Stecken Sie die R nder der V f rmigen Halterung in die Aussparungen in der rechteckigen Platte und ziehen Sie die Muttern fest an Schlitze 4 Befestigen Sie die verstellbare rechteckige Platte mit den beigef gten Schrauben an der Bridge D 2 Verwenden der Halterung fur Wandmontage D 5 Befestigen Sie die Bridge mi
137. bles Atheros proprietary Super A performance enhancements Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no super a Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless 802 11a Command Usage Super A enhancements include bursting compression and fast frames Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros compatible clients Example SMC AP if wireless a super a SMC AP if wireless a super g This command enables Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no super g Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless 802 119 Command Usage These enhancements include bursting compression fast frames and dynamic turbo Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros compatible clients Example SMC AP if wireless a super g SMC AP if wireless a 7 108 Wireless Interface Commands 7 description This command adds a description to a the wireless interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description lt string gt no description string Comment or a description for this interface Range 1 80 characters Default Setting Radio A Enterprise 802 11a Access Point Radio G Enterprise 802 119 Access Point Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0
138. bridge dynamic entry age time This command sets the time for aging out dynamic entries in the WDS forwarding table Syntax bridge dynamic entry age time lt seconds gt seconds The time to age out an address entry Range 10 10000 seconds Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If the MAC address of an entry in the address table is not seen on the associated interface for longer than the aging time the entry is discarded Example SMC AP config bridge dynamic entry age time 100 SMC AP config show bridge aging time This command displays the current WDS forwarding table aging time setting Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show bridge aging time Aging time 300 SMC AP 7 82 WDS Bridge Commands 7 show bridge filter entry This command displays current entries in the WDS forwarding table Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show bridge filter entry max entry numbers 512 current entry nums 13 Er JOO OIC Bridge MAC Addr Table 1611011 rk ttt eee cece eee ee ee HEHE RE MAC Port Fwd_type VlanID origin life remain Life Type 01 80 c2 00 00 00 0 5 4095 300 300 Static 01 80 c2 00 00 03 0 5 4095 300 300 Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 20 1 0 1 300 300 Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 21 1 0 1 300 300 Static 00 30 f1 fO 9b 22 1 0 1 300 300 Static 00 30 1 0 9b 23 1 0 1 300 300 Static 00 30 f1 f0 9b 24 1 0 1 300 300 Static 00 30 1 0 9b 25 1 0 1 300 300 St
139. cess for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting DEFAULT Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config radius server key green SMC AP config 7 61 7 Command Line Interface radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Syntax radius server secondary retransmit number_of_retries secondary Secondary server number_of_retries Number of times the access point will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config radius server retransmit 5 SMC AP config radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Syntax radius server secondary timeout number_of_seconds secondary Secondary server number_of_seconds Number of seconds the access point waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 60 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config radius server timeout 10 SMC AP config 7 62 RADIUS Client 7 radius server port accounting This command sets the RADIUS Accounting server network port Syntax radius server secondary port accounting lt port_number gt secondary Secondary server If secondary is not specified then the access point assumes you ar
140. cess the network check the following Be sure the access point and the wireless clients are configured with the same Service Set ID SSID If authentication or encryption are enabled ensure that the wireless clients are properly configured with the appropriate authentication or encryption keys If authentication is being performed through a RADIUS server ensure that the clients are properly configured on the RADIUS server If authentication is being performed through IEEE 802 1X be sure the wireless users have installed and properly configured 802 1X client software If MAC address filtering is enabled be sure the client s address is included in the local filtering database or on the RADIUS server database If the wireless clients are roaming between access points make sure that all the access points and wireless devices in the Extended Service Set ESS are configured to the same SSID and authentication method If the access point cannot be configured using the Telnet a web browser or SNMP software e Be sure to have configured the access point with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway If VLANs are enabled on the access point the management station should be configured to send tagged frames with a VLAN ID that matches the access point s management VLAN default VLAN 1 page 6 17 However to manage the access point from a wireless client the AP Management Filter should be disabled page 6 17
141. ch identifies the country of operation and sets the authorized radio channels Syntax country lt country_code gt country_code A two character code that identifies the country of operation See the following table for a full list of codes Table 7 5 Country Codes Country Code Country Code Country Code Country Code Albania AL Dominican DO Kuwait KW Romania RO Republic Algeria DZ Ecuador EC Latvia LV Russia RU Argentina AR Egypt EG Lebanon LB Saudi Arabia SA Armenia AM Estonia EE Liechtenstein LI Singapore SG Australia AU Finland FI Lithuania LT Slovak Republic SK Austria AT France FR Macao MO Spain ES Azerbaijan AZ Georgia GE Macedonia MK Sweden SE 7 12 System Management Commands 7 Table 7 5 Country Codes Country Code Country Code Country Code Country Code Bahrain BH Germany DE Malaysia MY Switzerland CH Belarus BY Greece GR Malta MT Syria SY Belgium BE Guatemala GT Mexico MX Taiwan TW Honduras HN Monaco MC Thailand TH Belize BZ Hong Kong HK Morocco MA Trinidad amp TT Tobago Bolivia BO Hungary HU Netherlands NL Tunisia TN Brazil BR Iceland IS New Zealand NZ Turkey TR Brunei BN India IN Norway NO Ukraine UA Darussalam Bulgaria BG Indonesia ID Qatar QA United Arab AE E mirates Canada CA Iran IR Oman OM United Kingdom GB Chile CL Ireland IE Pakistan PK United
142. ck the Delete button En Home k t it SNMP Target Addresses When you click on the New or Edit button in the SNMP Targets page a new page opens where the target parameters are configured Define the parameters and select a filter if required Note that the SNMP v3 user name must first be defined See Configuring SNMPv3 Users on page 6 46 Click Apply Note The Target ID cannot be changed in the Edit Target page Only the New Target page allows the Target ID to be configured SNMP Target Addresses Optional Filter Assignment Target ID A user defined name that identifies a receiver of notifications The access point supports up to 10 target IDs Maximum length 32 characters IP Address Specifies the IP address of the receiving management station 6 50 Radio Interface 6 UDP Port The UDP port that is used on the receiving management station for notification messages SNMP User The defined SNMP v3 user that is to receive notification messages Assigned Filter The name of a user defined notification filter that is applied to the target CLI Commands for Configuring SNMPv3 Targets To create a notification target use the snmp server targets command from the CLI configuration mode To assign a filter to a target use the snmp server filter assignment command To view the current SNMP targets use the show snmp target command from the CLI Exec mode To view filter assignment to targets use the s
143. client application to submit user credentials for authentication Client authentication is then verified by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol before the access point grants client access to the network The 802 1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and static broadcast keys to wireless clients Table 7 12 802 1X Authentication address filter table Command Function Mode Page 802 1x Configures 802 1X as disabled supported or required IC W VAP 7 66 802 1x broadcast key Sets the interval atwhich the primary broadcastkeys are IC W VAP 7 67 refresh rate refreshed for stations using 802 1X dynamic keying 802 1x session key Sets the interval at which unicast session keys are IC W VAP 7 68 refresh rate refreshed for associated stations using dynamic keying 802 1x session timeout Sets the timeout after which a connected client must be IC W VAP 7 68 re authenticated 802 1x supplicantenable Enables the access point to operate as a 802 1X GC 7 69 supplicant 802 1x supplicant user Sets the supplicant user name and password for the GC 7 69 access point show authentication Shows all 802 1X authentication settings as wellas the Exec 7 69 802 1x This command configures 802 1 X as optionally supported or as required for wireless clients Use the no form to disable 802 1X support Syntax 802 1x lt supported required gt no 802
144. clients Encryption The key size used for data encryption Authentication Type Shows the type of authentication used 802 1X Shows if IEEE 802 1X access control for wireless clients is enabled CLI Commands for Displaying System Settings To view the current access point system settings use the show system command from the Exec mode To view the interface wireless g command see page 7 113 SMC AP show system System Information Serial Number System Up time System Name System Location System Contact System Country Code MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask A123456789 0 days 4 hours 33 minutes Enterprise Wireless AP US UNITED STATES 00 30 F1 FO 9A 9C 192 168 2 2 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VLAN State DISABLED Management VLAN ID AP 1 IAPP State ENABLED DHCP Client ENABLED HTTP Server ENABLED HTTP Server Port 80 HTTPS Server ENABLED HTTPS Server Port 443 Slot Status Dual band a g Boot Rom Version s v3 0 7 Software Version 293 007 SSH Server ENABLED SSH Server Port 22 Telnet Server ENABLED WEB Redirect DISABLED DHCP Relay SMC AP DISABLED 29 seconds 6 90 Status Information 6 Station Status The Station Status window shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access point Interface G VAP D fi The Station Configuration page displays basic connection information for all associated stat
145. computational intensive operations of AES CCMP requires hardware support on client devices Therefore to implement WPA2 in the network wireless clients must be upgraded to WPA2 compliant hardware e WPA2 Mixed Mode WPA2 defines a transitional mode of operation for networks moving from WPA security to WPA2 WPA2 Mixed Mode allows both WPA and WPA2 clients to associate to a common SSID interface In mixed mode the unicast encryption cipher TKIP or AES CCMP is negotiated for each client The access point advertises its supported encryption ciphers in beacon frames and probe responses WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher they support and return the choice in the association request to the access point For mixed mode operation the cipher used for broadcast frames is always TKIP WEP encryption is not allowed e Key Caching WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security information in a cache so that if a client roams away from an access point and then returns re authentication is not required When a WPA2 client is first authenticated it receives a Pairwise Master Key PMk that is used to generate other keys for unicast data encryption This key and other client 6 82 Radio Interface 6 information form a Security Association that the access point names and holds in a cache Preauthentication Each time a client roams to another access point it has to be fully re authenticated This authentic
146. d e Disabled No checks are performed on an associating station s MAC address Local MAC The MAC address of the associating station is compared against the local database stored on the access point Use the Local MAC Authentication section of this web page to set up the local database and configure all access points in the wireless network service area with the same MAC address database Radius MAC The MAC address of the associating station is sent to a configured RADIUS server for authentication When using a RADIUS authentication server for MAC address authentication the server must first be configured in the Radius window see RADIUS on page 6 7 The database of MAC addresses and filtering policy must be defined in the RADIUS server Note MAC addresses on the RADIUS server can be entered in four different formats see RADIUS on page 6 7 802 1X Supplicant The access point can also operate in a 802 1X supplicant mode This enables the access point itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS server using a configured MD5 user name and password This prevents rogue access points from gaining access to the network 6 13 6 System Configuration Local MAC Authentication Configures the local MAC authentication database The MAC database provides a mechanism to take certain actions based on a wireless client s MAC address The MAC list can be configured to allow or deny network access to specific clients Sys
147. d Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Example SMC AP if wireless a wmm required SMC AP if wireless a wmm acknowledge policy This command allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or disabled for each Access Category AC Syntax wmm acknowledge policy lt ac_number gt lt ack noack gt ac_number Access categories Range 0 3 ack Require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver noack Does not require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver Default ack Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage e WMM defines four access categories ACs voice video best effort and background These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802 1D priority tags see Table 6 1 The direct mapping of the four ACs to 802 1D priorities is specifically intended to facilitate 7 138 WMM Commands 7 interpretability with other wired network QoS policies While the four ACs are specified for specific types of traffic WMM allows the priority levels to be configured to match any network wide QoS policy WMM also specifies a protocol that access points can use to communicate the configured traffic priority levels to QoS enabled wireless clients Although turning off the requirement for the sender to wait for an acknowledgement can increases data throughput it can also result in a high number of errors w
148. d displays the status of the SSH server Example SMC AP if ethernet ip ssh server enable SMC AP if ethernet ip ssh server port This command sets the Secure Shell server port Use the no form to disable the server Syntax ip ssh server port lt port number gt port number The UDP port used by the SSH server Range 1 65535 Default Setting 22 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Example SMC AP if ethernet ip ssh server port 1124 SMC AP if ethernet 7 16 System Management Commands 7 ip telnet server enable This command enables the Telnet server Use the no form to disable the server Syntax ip telnet server enable no ip telnet server Default Setting Interface enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Example SMC AP if ethernet ip telnet server enable SMC AP if ethernet ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port lt port number gt no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1024 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config ip http port 769 SMC AP config Related Commands ip http server 7 18 7 17 7 Command Line Interface ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or c
149. d in the country of operation Example SMC AP if wireless g antenna location indoor SMC AP if wireless g 7 104 Wireless Interface Commands 7 beacon interval This command configures the rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point Syntax beacon interval lt interval gt interval The rate for transmitting beacon signals Range 20 1000 milliseconds Default Setting 100 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the access point They may also carry power management information Example SMC AP if wireless g beacon interval 150 SMC AP if wireless g dtim period This command configures the rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast multicast transmissions Syntax dtim period lt interval gt interval Interval between the beacon frames that transmit broadcast or multicast traffic Range 1 255 beacon frames Default Setting 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage e The Delivery Traffic Indication Map DTIM packet interval value indicates how often the MAC layer forwards broadcast multicast traffic This parameter is necessary to wake up stations that are using Power Save mode The DTIM is the interval between two synchronous frames with broadcast multicast information The default value of 2 indicates that the
150. devices in the service area Options 100 50 25 12 minimum Default 100 Note When operating the access point using 5 GHz channels in a European Community country the end user and installer are obligated to operate the device in accordance with European regulatory requirements for Transmit Power Control TPC Maximum Supported Rate The maximum data rate at which the access point transmits unicast packets on the wireless interface The maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate The lower the data rate the longer the transmission distance Options 54 48 36 24 Mbps Default 54 Mbps Maximum Associated Clients Sets the maximum number of clients that can be associated with a VAP interface at the same time Range 1 64 per VAP interface Default 64 Antenna ID Selects the antenna to be used by the access point Default Integrated antenna ID 0000 If there is no integrated antenna id 0x0000 module NA is displayed in the list Note The Antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the Antenna Control Method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options Antenna Control Method Selects the use of two antennas operating in diversity mode or a single antenna Default Diversity Diversity The radio uses two identical antennas in a diversity system 6 59 6 System Configuration Right The radio uses a single antenna on the right side Select this method when using
151. dge The path cost and priority for each bridge link can be set using the bridge link path cost and bridge link port priority command from the Wireless Interface configuration mode The path cost and priority can also be set for the Ethernet port from the Ethernet Interface configuration mode To view the current STP settings use the show bridge stp command Enterprise AP config bridge stp enable 6 104 Enterprise AP config bridge stp forwarding delay 2500 6 105 Enterprise AP config bridge stp hello time 500 6 106 Enterprise AP config bridge stp max age 4000 6 107 Enterprise AP config bridge stp priority 40000 6 108 Enterprise AP config interface wireless a Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge link path cost 2 40 6 109 Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge link port priority 2 64 6 110 Enterprise AP if wireless a exit Enterprise AP show bridge stp 6 111 Bridge MAC 00 30 F1 F0 9A 9C Status Disabled priority 32768 desiginated root priority 0 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 root path cost i root Port no 2 0 Hold Time 0 Seconds Hello Time 0 Seconds Maximum Age 0 Seconds Forward Delay 0 Seconds bridge Hello Time 2 Seconds bridge Maximum Age 20 Seconds bridge Forward Delay 5 Seconds time since top change 3168 Seconds topology change count 0 Enterprise AP 6 26 Advanced Configuration 6 AP Management The Web Telnet and SNMP management interfaces are enabled and open to all IP addresses by def
152. diate connection to the nearest access point Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing ODFM OFDM allows multiple users to transmit in an allocated band by dividing the bandwidth into many narrow bandwidth carriers Glossary 3 Glossary Power over Ethernet PoE A specification for providing both power and data to low power network devices using a single Category 5 Ethernet cable PoE provides greater flexibility in the locating of access point s and network devices and significantly decreased installation costs RADIUS A logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to the network Roaming A wireless LAN mobile user moves around an ESS and maintains a continuous connection to the infrastructure network RTS Threshold Transmitters contending for the medium may not be aware of each other RTS CTS mechanism can solve this Hidden Node Problem If the packet size is smaller than the preset RTS Threshold size the RTS CTS mechanism will NOT be enabled Service Set Identifier SSID An identifier that is attached to packets sent over the wireless LAN and functions as a password for joining a particular radio cell i e Basic Service Set BSS Session Key Session keys are unique to each client and are used to authenticate a client connection and correlate traffic passing between a specific client and the access point Shared Key A shared key can be used t
153. dress of the access point or use the default address http 192 168 2 2 To log into the access point enter the default user name admin and then press LOGIN When the home page displays click on Advanced Setup The following page will display SYSTEM Identification TCP IP Settings RADIUS SSH Authentication Filter Control e VLAN e wos Advanced Setup Advanced setup is designed for advanced users After modification click Apply to save the changes AP Management Administration System Log RSSI SNMP e SNMP SNMP Trap Filter SNMP Targets SLOT O Radio A Radio Settings e Security SLOT 1 Radio G Radio Settings wi The information in this chapter is organized to reflect the structure of the web screens for easy reference However it is recommended that you configure a user name and password as the first step under Administration to control management access to this device page 6 28 6 1 6 System Configuration Advanced Configuration The Advanced Configuration pages include the following options Table 6 1 Menu Set Identifier SSID and configures wireless security Menu Description Page System Configures basic administrative and client access 6 3 Identification Specifies the host name 6 3 TCP IP Settings Configures the IP address subnet mask gateway
154. e The access point name used for authentication to the network Range 1 32 alphanumeric characters password The MD5 password used for access point authentication Range 1 32 alphanumeric characters Default None 7 69 7 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point currently only supports EAP MD5 CHAP for 802 1X supplicant authentication Example SMC AP config 802 1x supplicant user WA6102 dotlixpass SMC AP config show authentication This command shows all 802 1X authentication settings as well as the address filter table Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show authentication Authentication Information MAC Authentication Server DISABLED MAC Auth Session Timeout Value 0 min 802 1x supplicant DISABLED 802 1x supplicant user EMPTY 802 1x supplicant password EMPTY Address Filtering ALLOWED System Default ALLOW addresses not found in filter table Filter Table MAC Address Status 00 70 50 cc 99 la DENIED 00 70 50 cc 99 1b ALLOWED SMC AP config 7 70 MAC Address Authentication 7 MAC Address Authentication Use these commands to define MAC authentication on the access point For local MAC authentication first define the default filtering policy using the address filter default command Then enter the MAC addresses to be filtered indicating if they are allowed or denied For RADIUS MAC authentication the MAC
155. e traffic is not forwarded to the Ethernet port from the radio interface e Root Bridge Operates as the root bridge in the wireless bridge network Up to six Child links are available to other bridges in the network e Master Slave Mode Selects between Master and Slave mode A single master enables up to five slave links whereas a slave will have only one link to the master Bridge Parent The physical layer address of the root bridge unit or the bridge unit connected to the root bridge 12 hexadecimal digits in the form XX XX XX XX XX XX e Channel Auto Sync Allows a Bridge Child to automatically find the operating channel used by its Bridge Parent Caution Do not enable Channel Auto Sync on a master bridge if there is no root bridge acting as the master bridge s parent e Bridge Child The physical layer address of other bridge units for which this unit serves as the bridge parent or the root bridge Note that the first entry under the list of child nodes is reserved for the root bridge and can only be configured if the role is set to Root Bridge 12 hexadecimal digits in the form XX XX XX XX XX XX 6 22 Advanced Configuration 6 Spanning Tree Protocol OEnable Disable 32768 120 2 L iis 802 110 Interface 128 1128 128 128 128 128 128 ree 128 128 128 free S N H z t AAAA AAN 1
156. e SNMP web and Telnet groups e subnet_mask Specifies a range of IP addresses allowed management access Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If anyone tries to access a management interface on the access point from an invalid address the unit will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet 7 21 7 Command Line Interface the access point will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the access point will accept overlapping address ranges e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses SMC AP config apmgmtip multiple 192 168 1 50 255 255 255 0 SMC AP config APmgmtUl This command enables and disables management access to the access point through SNMP Telnet and web interfaces Caution Secure Web
157. e configuring the primary RADIUS server port_number RADIUS Accounting server UDP port used for accounting messages Range 0 or 1024 65535 Default Setting 0 disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e When the RADIUS Accounting server UDP port is specified a RADIUS accounting session is automatically started for each user that is successfully authenticated to the access point Example SMC AP config radius server port accounting 1813 SMC AP config radius server timeout interim This command sets the interval between transmitting accounting updates to the RADIUS server Syntax radius server secondary timeout interim lt number_of_seconds gt secondary Secondary server number_of_seconds Number of seconds the access point waits between transmitting accounting updates Range 60 86400 Default Setting 3600 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point sends periodic accounting updates after every interim period until the user logs off and a stop message is sent 7 63 7 Command Line Interface Example SMC AP config radius server timeout interim 500 SMC AP config radius server radius mac format This command sets the format for specifying MAC addresses on the RADIUS server Syntax radius server radius mac format lt multi colon multi dash no delimiter single dash gt e multi colon Enter MAC addresses in the form xx
158. e corresponding Passphrase field Priv Type The data encryption type used for the SNMP user either DES or none When DES is selected enter a key in the corresponding Passphrase field Passphrase The password or key associated with the authentication and privacy settings A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Action Click the Add button to add a new user to the list Click the edit button to change details of an existing user Click the Del button to remove a user from the list Note Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels For example a user who has Auth Type and Priv Type configured to MD5 and DES respectively that it uses both authentication and data encryption must be assigned to the RWPriv group If this same user were instead assigned to the read only RO group the user would not be able to access the database 6 46 sm 6 CLI Commands for Configuring SNMPv3 Users Use the snmp server engine id command to define the SNMP v3 engine before assigning users to groups Use the snmp server user command to assign users to one of the three groups and set the appropriate authentication and encryption types to be used To view the current SNMP v3 engine ID use the show snmp command To view SNMP users and group settings use the show snmp users or show snmp group assignments commands Enterprise AP config snmp server engine id 1a 2b 3c 4d 00 ff 7 46 Enterprise A
159. e following information to configure an SNMP v3 user user name A user defined string for the SNMP user 32 characters maximum group name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned 32 characters maximum There are three pre defined groups RO RWAuth or RWPriv auth proto The authentication type used for user authentication md5 or none auth passphrase The user password required when authentication is used 8 32 characters priv proto The encryption type used for SNMP data encryption des or none priv passphrase The user password required when data encryption is used 8 32 characters e Users must be assigned to groups that have the same security levels If a user who has AuthPriv security uses authentication and encryption is assigned to a read only RO group the user will not be able to access the database An AuthPriv user must be assigned to the RWPriv group with the AuthPriv security level To configure a user for the RWAuth group you must include the auth proto and auth passphrase keywords To configure a user for the RWPriv group you must include the auth proto auth passphrase priv proto and priv passphrase keywords Example SMC AP config snmp server user User Name lt 1 32 gt chris Group Name lt 1 32 gt RWPriv Authtype md5 lt cr gt none md5 Passphrase lt 8 32 gt a good secret Privacy des lt cr gt none des Passphrase lt 8 32 gt a v
160. e manually distributed to all clients that want to use the network WEP is the security protocol initially specified in the IEEE 802 11 standard for wireless communications Unfortunately WEP has been found to be seriously flawed and cannot be recommended for a high level of network security For more robust wireless security the access point provides Wi Fi Protected Access WPA for improved data encryption and user authentication 6 75 6 System Configuration Setting up shared keys enables the basic IEEE 802 11 Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP on the access point to prevent unauthorized access to the network If you choose to use WEP shared keys instead of an open system be sure to define at least one static WEP key for user authentication and data encryption Also be sure that the WEP shared keys are the same for each client in the wireless network Note that all clients share the same keys which are used for user authentication and data encryption Up to four keys can be specified These four keys are used for all VAP interfaces on the same radio To set up WEP shared keys click Radio Settings under Radio A or Radio G Key Type Hexadecimal For 64 Bit enter 10 digits for 128 Bit enter 26 digits for 152 Bit enter 32 digits Alphanumeric For 64 Bit enter 5 characters for 128 Bit enter 13 characters for 152 Bit enter 16 characters MH Osm Oreo Oisze nmo 64 Bit 28 Bit 152 Bit None 64 Bit S Bit 152 Bt
161. e mask that identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets 6 5 6 System Configuration Default Gateway The default gateway is the IP address of the router for the access point which is used if the requested destination address is not on the local subnet If you have management stations DNS RADIUS or other network servers located on another subnet type the IP address of the default gateway router in the text field provided Otherwise leave the address as all zeros 0 0 0 0 Primary and Secondary DNS Address The IP address of Domain Name Servers on the network A DNS maps numerical IP addresses to domain names and can be used to identify network hosts by familiar names instead of the IP addresses If you have one or more DNS servers located on the local network type the IP addresses in the text fields provided Otherwise leave the addresses as all zeros 0 0 0 0 CLI Commands for TCP IP Settings From the global configuration mode enter the interface configuration mode with the interface ethernet command Use the ip dhcp command to enable the DHCP client or no ip dhcp to disable it To manually configure an address specify the new IP address subnet mask and default gateway using the ip address command To specify DNS server addresses use the dns server command Then use the show interface ethernet command from the Exec mode to display the current IP settings SMC AP config interface ethernet
162. e network all other bridges must be Slave units Using the 5 GHz 8 dBi omnidirectional external antenna the SMC2890W AG can connect to SMC2891W AG units up to 3 3 km 2 miles away Using the 13 5 dBi 120 degree sector antenna the SMC2890W AG can connect to SMC2891W AG units up to 10 3 km 6 4 miles away SMC2891W AG x s SMC2891W AG Z Z SMC2891W AG SMC2890W AG with SMC2891W AG Omnidirectional SMC2891W AG SMC2891W AG SMC2891W AG SMC2890W AG with SMC2891W AG Sector Antenna SMC2891W AG 2 5 2 Network Configuration 2 6 Chapter 3 Bridge Link Planning The Dual band Outdoor Access Point Bridge supports fixed point to point or point to multipoint wireless links A single link between two points can be used to connect a remote site to larger core network Multiple bridge links can provide a way to connect widespread Ethernet LANs For each link in a wireless bridge network to be reliable and provide optimum performance some careful site planning is required This chapter provides guidance and information for planning your wireless bridge links Note The planning and installation of the wireless bridge requires professional personnel that are trained in the installation of radio transmitting equipment The user is responsible for compliance with local regulations concerning items such as antenna power use of lightning arrestors grounding and radio mast o
163. e parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter SMC AP config username smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input 7 2 Entering Commands 7 Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity the configure example typing con followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to configure Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by following a command with the 2 character to list keywords or parameters Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current configuration mode Exec Global Configuration or Interface You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands SMC AP show APmanagement Show management AP information authentication Show Authentication parameters bootfile Show bootfile name bridge Show bridge config System snapshot
164. e wireless interface Options 24 12 6 Mbps Default 6 Mbps Fragmentation Length Configures the minimum packet size that can be fragmented when passing through the access point Fragmentation of the PDUs Package Data Unit can increase the reliability of transmissions because it increases the probability of a successful transmission due to smaller frame size If there is significant interference present or collisions due to high network utilization try setting the fragment size to send smaller fragments This will speed up the retransmission of smaller frames However it is more efficient to set the fragment size larger if very little or no interference is present because it requires overhead to send multiple frames Range 256 2346 bytes Default 2346 bytes RTS Threshold Sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send RTS signal must be sent to a receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the sending of a data frame After receiving an RTS frame the station sends a CTS clear to send frame to notify the sending station that it can start sending data If the RTS threshold is set to 0 the access point always sends RTS signals If set to 2347 the access point never sends RTS signals If set to any other value and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold the RTS CTS Request to Send Clear to Send mechanis
165. ecurity in small networks Requires manual management of pre shared key WPA2 with 802 1X Requires WPA enabled system and network card driver native support provided in Windows XP Provides the strongest security in WP A2 only mode Provides robust security in mixed mode for WPA and WPA2 clients Offers fast roaming for time sensitive client applications Requires configured RADIUS server 802 1X EAP type may require management of digital certificates for clients and server Clients may require hardware upgrade to be WPA2 compliant WPA2 PSK Mode Requires WPA enabled system and network card driver native support provided in Windows XP Provides robust security in small networks Requires manual management of pre shared key Clients may require hardware upgrade to be WPA2 compliant Note You must enable data encryption through the web or CLI in order to enable all types of encryption WEP TKIP or AES in the access point The access point can simultaneously support clients using various different security mechanisms The configuration for these security combinations are outlined in the following table Note that MAC address authentication can be configured independently to work with all security mechanisms and is indicated separately in the table Required RADIUS server support is also listed Table 6 3 Security Combinations Client Security Configuration Summary
166. eeds time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Range 4 30 seconds Default 15 e Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Link Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority 6 24 Advanced Configuration 6 Range 1 65535 Default Ethernet interface 19 Wireless interface 40 Link Port Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 CLI Commands for WDS Settings To set the role of the access point radio interface use the bridge role command from the CLI wireless interface configuration mode If the role of the radio interface is set to Bridge or Repeater the MAC address of
167. eless clients from accessing the management interface on the access point Use the no form to disable this filtering Syntax filter ap manage no filter ap manage Default Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config filter AP manage SMC AP config 7 15 7 Command Line Interface filter uplink enable This command enables filtering of MAC addresses from the Ethernet port Syntax no filter uplink enable Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config filter uplink enable SMC AP config filter uplink This command adds or deletes MAC addresses from the uplink filtering table Syntax filter uplink lt add delete gt MAC address MAC address Specifies a MAC address in the form xx xx Xx XX XX Xx A maximum of four addresses can be added to the filtering table Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config filter uplink add 00 12 34 56 78 9a SMC AP config filter ethernet type enable This command checks the Ethernet type on all incoming and outgoing Ethernet packets against the protocol filtering table Use the no form to disable this feature Syntax filter ethernet type enable no filter ethernet type enable Default Disabled Command Mode 7 76 Filtering Commands 7 Global Configuration Command Usage This command is used in conjunction with the filter et
168. encryption in order to enable all types of encryption in the access point 2 Select TKIP when any WPA clients do not support AES Select AES only if all clients support AES CLI Commands for WPA Using Pre shared Key Security From the VAP interface configuration mode use the auth wpa psk required command to enable WPA Pre shared Key security To enter a key value use the wpa pre shared key command to specify a hexadecimal or alphanumeric key To view the current security settings use the show interface wireless a 0 3 or show interface wireless g 0 3 command not shown in example SMC AP config interface wireless g 7 90 Enter Wireless configuration commands one per line Enterprise AP if wireless g vap 0 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 wpa pre shared key passphrase key agoodsecret 7 128 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 auth wpa psk required Data Encryption is set to Enabled WPA2 Clients Mode is set to Disabled WPA Clients Mode is set to Required WPA Multicast Cipher is set to TKIP WPA Unicast Cipher can accept TKIP only WPA Authentication is set to Pre Shared Key SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 6 85 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for WPA Over 802 1X Security From the VAP interface configuration mode use the auth wpa required command to select WPA over 802 1X security Then set the 802 1X key refresh rates To view the current security settings use the show interface wireless a 0 3 or show interface wi
169. ent Countries of Operation amp Conditions of Use in the European Community This device is intended to be operated in all countries of the European Community Requirements for indoor vs outdoor operation license requirements and allowed channels of operation apply in some countries as described below Note The user must use the configuration utility provided with this product to ensure the channels of operation are in conformance with the spectrum usage rules for European Community countries as described below This device requires that the user or installer properly enter the current country of operation in the command line interface as described in the user guide before operating this device e This device will automatically limit the allowable channels determined by the current country of operation Incorrectly entering the country of operation may result in illegal operation and may cause harmful interference to other system The user is obligated to ensure the device is operating according to the channel limitations indoor outdoor restrictions and license requirements for each European Community country as described in this document This device employs a radar detection feature required for European Community operation in the 5 GHz band This feature is automatically enabled when the country of operation is correctly configured for any European Community country The presence of nearby radar operation may result in temporary i
170. ently asscociated Uses a short preamble 96 microseconds if all associated clients can support it otherwise a long preamble is used The access point can increase data throughput when using a short preamble but will only use a short preamble if it determines that all associated clients support it CLI Commands for the 802 11g Wireless Interface From the global configuration mode enter the interface wireless g command to access the 802 11g radio interface The 802 11g radio can be forced to an 802 11g only 802 11b only or mixed 802 11b g operating mode using the radio mode command You should set the desired operating mode before configuring channel settings the default is mixed 802 11b g operation Select a radio channel or set selection to Auto using the channel command Set any other radio settings as required before enabling the VAP interface with the no shutdown command To view the current 802 11g radio settings for the VAP interface use the show interface wireless g 0 3 command as shown on 7 97 SMC AP config interface wireless g 7 90 Enter Wireless configuration commands one per line Enterprise AP if wireless g radio mode g 7 101 SMC AP if wireless g channel auto 7 100 SMC AP if wireless a transmit power full 7 100 SMC AP if wireless a super g 7 108 Enterprise AP if wireless g preamble short 7 102 SMC AP if wireless g Security The access point is configured by default as an open system whic
171. er because the access point sends the keys during the 802 1X authentication process these keys do not have to appear in the client s key list In a mixed mode environment with clients using static and dynamic keys select transmit key index 2 3 or 4 The access point uses transmit key index 1 for the generation of dynamic keys Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 transmit key 2 SMC AP if wireless g 7 125 7 Command Line Interface cipher suite This command defines the cipher algorithm used to encrypt the global key for broadcast and multicast traffic when using Wi Fi Protected Access WPA security Syntax multicast cipher lt aes ccmp tkip wep gt aes ccmp Use AES CCMP encryption for the unicast and multicast cipher tkip Use TKIP encryption for the multicast cipher TKIP or AES CCMP can be used for the unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client wep Use WEP encryption for the multicast cipher TKIP or AES CCMP can be used for the unicast cipher depending on the capability of the client Default Setting wep Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage 7 126 WPA enables the access point to support different unicast encryption keys for each client However the global encryption key for multicast and broadcast traffic must be the same for all clients If any clients supported by the access point are not WPA enabled the multicast cipher algorithm
172. erver e 3 Third syslog server 4 Fourth syslog server host_name The name of a syslog server Range 1 20 characters host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server udp_port The UDP port used by the syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 7 30 System Logging Commands 7 Example SMC AP config logging host 1 10 1 0 3 SMC AP config logging console This command initiates logging of error messages to the console Use the no form to disable logging to the console Syntax logging console no logging console Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config logging console SMC AP config logging level This command sets the minimum severity level for event logging Syntax logging level lt Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational Debug gt Default Setting Informational Command Mode Global Configuration 7 31 7 Command Line Interface Command Usage Messages sent include the selected level down to Emergency level Level Argument Description Emergency System unusable Alert Immediate action needed Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected ret
173. ery good secret SMC AP config 7 48 SNMP Commands 7 snmp server targets This command configures SNMP v3 notification targets Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 target Syntax snmp server targets lt target id gt lt ip addr gt lt sec name gt version 3 udp port port number notification type TRAP no snmp server targets lt target id gt e target id A user defined name that identifies a receiver of SNMP notifications Maximum length 32 characters ip addr Specifies the IP address of the management station to receive notifications sec name The defined SNMP v3 user name that is to receive notifications version The SNMP version of notifications Currently only version 3 is supported in this command udp port The UDP port that is used on the receiving management station for notifications notification type The type of notification that is sent Currently only TRAP is supported Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point supports up to 10 SNMP v3 target IDs e The SNMP v3 user name that is specified in the target must first be configured using the snmp server user command Example SMC AP config snmp server targets mytraps 192 168 1 33 chris SMC AP config 7 49 7 Command Line Interface snmp server filter This command configures SNMP v3 notification filters Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 f
174. ess clients Also you can block specific Ethernet traffic from being forwarded by the access point Filter Control Inter Client STAs Communication Filter Disable O Prevent intra VAP client communication O Prevent inter and intra VAP client communication AP Management Filter Disable Enable Prevent AP mamagement via wireless client Uplink Port MAC Address Filtering Status Disable Enable Ethernet Type Filter Disable O Enable Local Management O Arone DDP 0 872d orr OON Appletak ARP 80 orF Oon ee er OFF OON I 0002 orF OoN PG 2000 orr OON AI 9 6004 orF OoN Inter Client STAs Communication Filter Sets the global mode for wireless to wireless communications between clients associated to Virtual AP VAP interfaces on the access point Default Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client Communication e Disabled All clients can communicate with each other through the access point Prevent Intra VAP client communication When enabled clients associated with a specific VAP interface cannot establish wireless communications with each other Clients can communicate with clients associated to other VAP interfaces e Prevent Inter and Intra VAP client communication When enabled clients cannot establish wireless communications with any other client either those associated to the same VAP interface or any other VAP interface AP Management Filter Controls management access to the
175. ettings page and scroll down to below the VAP radio settings Radio Channel There s no 11a channel supported by this country Auto Channel Select Disable Enable Transmit Power 100 Maximum Supported Rate 54 Mbps Maximum Association Client 64 Antenna ID id 0x0000 module NA v Antenna Control Method Diversity Antenna Location Indoor MIC Mode Hardware Software Super A Disable O Enable Beacon Interval 20 1000 100 TUs Data Beacon Rate DTIM 1 255 1 Beacons Fragment Length 256 2346 2346 Bytes RTS Threshold 0 2347 2347 Bytes Turbo Mode The normal 802 11a wireless operation mode provides connections up to 54 Mbps Turbo Mode is an enhanced mode not regulated in IEEE 802 11a that provides a higher data rate of up to 108 Mbps Enabling Turbo Mode allows the access point to provide connections up to 108 Mbps Default Disabled Note In normal mode the access point provides a channel bandwidth of 20 MHz and supports the maximum number of channels permitted by local regulations e g 13 channels for the United States In Turbo Mode the channel bandwidth is increased to 40 MHz to support the increased data rate However this reduces the number of channels supported e g 5 channels for the United States Note Check your country s regulations to see if Turbo Mode is allowed 6 58 Radio Interface 6 Radio Channel The radio channel that the access point uses
176. evice root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STP root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority e Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Bridge Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Range 6 40 seconds e Default 20 e Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Bridge Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Range 1 10 seconds Default 2 e Minimum 1 e Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 Bridge Forwarding Delay The maximum time in seconds this device waits before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port n
177. face 6 51 Radio Settings Configures common radio signal parameters and other settings for 6 53 each VAP interface Security Enables each virtual access point VAP interface sets the Service 6 70 6 2 Advanced Configuration 6 Table 6 1 Menu Menu Description Page Radio Interface G Configures the IEEE 802 11 interface 6 51 Radio Settings Configures common radio signal parameters and other settings for 6 68 each VAP interface Security Enables each VAP interface sets the SSID and configures 6 70 wireless security Status Displays information about the access point and wireless clients 6 88 AP Status Displays configuration settings for the basic system and the 6 88 wireless interface Station Station Shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access 6 91 point Event Logs Shows log messages stored in memory 6 93 System Identification The system name for the access point can be left at its default setting However modifying this parameter can help you to more easily distinguish different devices in your network Hone Identification System Name SMC Enterprise AP Bridge The system name is designed for the user to uniquely identify this device System Name An alias for the access point enabling the device to be uniquely identified on the network Default SMC Enterprise AP Bridge Range 1 32 characters 6 3 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for System
178. fic using specific Ethernet protocol types WDS Bridge Configures WDS forwarding table settings 7 18 Spanning Tree Configures spanning tree parameters 7 85 Ethemet Interface Configures connection parameters for the Ethernet interface 7 90 Wireless Interface Configures radio interface settings 7 95 Wireless Security Configures radio interface security and encryption settings 7 116 Rogue AP Detection Configures settings for the detection of rogue access points in the 7 116 network Link Integrity Configures a link check to a host device on the wired network 7 130 IAP P Enables roaming between multi vendor access points 7 134 VLANs Configures VLAN membership 7 135 WMM Configures WMM quality of service parameters 7 137 The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations Exec Executive Mode GC Global Configuration IC E Interface Ethernet Configuration IC W Interface Wireless Configuration and IC W VAP Interface Wireless VAP Configuration General Commands Table 7 3 General Commands Command Function Mode Page configure Activates global configuration mode Exec 7 8 end Returns to previous configuration mode GC IC 7 8 exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the CLI any 7 8 ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the Exec 7 9 network reset Restarts the system Exec 7 10 show history Show
179. folder syscfg Other than to indicate a path the file name must not contain any slashes or the leading letter cannot be a period and the maximum length for file names on the FTP TFTP server is 255 characters Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ IP Address IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server Username The user ID used for login on an FTP server Password The password used for login on an FTP server Restore Factory Settings Click the Restore button to reset the configuration settings for the access point to the factory defaults and reboot the system Note that all user configured information will be lost You will have to re enter the default user name admin to re gain management access to this device Reboot Access Point Click the Reset button to reboot the system Note If you have upgraded system software then you must reboot the access point to implement the new operation code New software that is incompatible with the current configuration automatically restores the access point to default values when first activated after a reboot 6 31 6 System Configuration Upon uploading a new configuration file you will be prompted to either restore factory settings or reboot the unit Suggestion Using new default configuration settings lets system be more efficient but system will lose current settings GotoPrevious Restore Reboot CLI Commands for Downloadi
180. fter successful wireless association with the access point The 802 1X supported mode allows access for clients not using WPA or WPA2 security Required The access point enforces 802 1X authentication for all associated wireless clients If 802 1X authentication is not initiated by a client the access point will initiate authentication Only those clients successfully authenticated with 802 1X are allowed to access the network Note If 802 1X is enabled on the access point then RADIUS setup must be completed See RADIUS on page 6 7 When 802 1X is enabled the broadcast and session key rotation intervals can also be configured Broadcast Key Refresh Rate Sets the interval at which the broadcast keys are refreshed for stations using 802 1X dynamic keying Range 0 1440 minutes Default 0 means disabled e Session Key Refresh Rate The interval at which the access point refreshes unicast session keys for associated clients Range 0 1440 minutes Default 0 means disabled 6 87 6 System Configuration 802 1X Reauthentication Refresh Rate The time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated During the re authentication process of verifying the clients credentials on the RADIUS server the client remains connected the network Only if re authentication fails is network access blocked Range 0 65535 seconds Default 0 means disabled CLI Commands for 802 1X Authentication Use the 802 1X su
181. g command SMC AP config logging on 7 30 SMC AP config logging level alert 7 31 SMC AP config logging console 7 31 SMC AP config logging host 1 IP 10 1 0 3 514 7 30 SMC AP config logging host 1 Port 514 7 30 SMC AP config logging facility type 19 7 32 SMC AP config exit SMC AP show logging 7 33 Logging Information Syslog State Enabled Logging Console State Enabled Logging Level Alert Logging Facility Type 19 Servers 1 10 1 0 3 UDP Port 514 State Enabled 2 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 3 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled SMC AP Configuring SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the access point to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the access point enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries If the clock is not set the access point will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup The access point acts as an SNTP client periodically sending time synchronization requests to specific time servers You can configure up to two time server IP addresses The access point will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence SNTP Server Configures the access point to operate as an SNTP client When enabled at least one time server IP address must be specified e Primary Server
182. g in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Wireless 5 GHz Band Statement As the access point can operate in the 5150 5250 MHz frequency band it is limited by the FCC Industry Canada and some other countries to indoor use only so as to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co channel Mobile Satellite systems High power radars are allocated as primary users meaning they have priority of the 5250 5350 MHz and 5650 5850 MHz bands These radars could cause interference and or damage to the access point VCCI Notice This is a class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may arise When such trouble occurs the user may be required to take corrective actions COMB FRUHBERESERRAEA EN EZ VCCI OLE IEI lt SIFZAHRENKETT CORBERERE CHATS CBR RHE AMOTCEMHBVED COBAKIASMBIOM RET SLIBRENSETEMHVET EC Conformance Declaration CE Marking by the above symbol indicates compliance with the Essential Requirements of the R amp TTE Directive of the European Union 1999 5 EC This equipment meets the following conformance standards EN 60950 IEC 60950 Product Safety e EN 301 893 Technical requirements for 5 GHz radio equipment EN 300 328 Technical requirements for 2 4 GHz radio equipment e EN 301 489 1 EN 301 489 17 EMC requirements for radio equipm
183. g the Wi Fi Multimedia WMM standard Using WMM the access point is able to prioritize traffic and optimize performance when multiple applications compete for wireless network bandwidth at the same time WMM employs techniques that are a subset of the developing IEEE 802 11e QoS standard and it enables the access point to inter operate with both WMM enabled clients and other devices that may lack any WMM functionality The WMM commands supported by the access point are listed below Table 7 22 WMM Commands Command Function Mode Page wmm Sets the WMM operational mode on the access point IC W 7 138 wmm acknowledge Allows the acknowledgement wait time to be enabled or IC W 7 138 policy disabled for each Access Category AC wmmparam Configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the IC W 7 139 access point AP or the wireless clients BSS 7 137 7 Command Line Interface wmm This command sets the WMM operational mode on the access point Use the no form to disable WMM Syntax no wmm lt supported required gt supported WMM will be used for any associated device that supports this feature Devices that do not support this feature may still associate with the access point required WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the access point Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to associate with the access point Default supported Comman
184. gated based on user groups or application traffic Each VAP can have up to 64 wireless clients whereby the clients associate with these VAPs the same as they would with a physical access point Note The radio channel settings for the access point are limited by local regulations which determine the number of channels that are available Refer to General Specifications on page C 1 for additional information on the maximum number channels available 6 52 Radio Interface 6 Radio Settings A 802 11a The IEEE 802 11a interface operates within the 5 GHz band at up to 54 Mbps in normal mode or up to 108 Mbps in Turbo mode First configure the radio settings that apply to the individual VAPs Virtual Access Point and the common radio settings that apply to the overall system After you have configured the radio settings go to the Security page under the 802 a Interface See Security on page 6 70 enable the radio service for any of the VAP interfaces and then set an SSID to identify the wireless network service provided by each VAP Remember that only clients with the same SSID can associate with a VAP Note You must first enable VAP interface 0 before the other interfaces can be enabled Configuring VAP Radio Settings To configure VAP radio settings select the Radio Settings page SRM 802 11a ii Radio Settings Individual Default VLAN ID 1 4094 1 1 Disable O Enable Disable O Enable Di
185. geliefert 3 Achten Sie darauf das Ger t mit einer passenden Erdungsleitung nicht mitgeliefert zu erden indem Sie die Leitung an der Erdungsschraube am Ger t anbringen Achtung Vergewissern Sie sich dass ein Schutzleiter verf gbar ist und dass er den rtlichen und staatlichen Vorschriften f r elektrische Anlagen z B VDE entspricht Als Zusatzschutz gegen Blitzeinschlag sollten Sie Blitzableiter berspannungsableiter oder Spannungssto Entst rer einsetzen D 6 Anschlie en des PoE Injectors D AnschlieBen des PoE Injectors So schlie en Sie die drahtlose Bridge an eine Stromquelle an Achtung Installieren Sie den PoE Injector nicht im Freien Das Ger t darf nur in Innenraumen installiert werden Hinweis Der Ethernet Port der drahtlosen Bridge unterst tzt kein PoE Power over Ethernet auf Basis des IEEE 802 3af Standards Versuchen Sie nicht das Gerat dadurch mit Strom zu versorgen indem Sie es direkt an einen Netzwerk Switch anschlie en der ber IEEE 802 3af PoE verf gt SchlieBen Sie das Gerat immer an das mitgelieferte Injector Modul fur Stromversorgung an 1 Verbinden Sie das Ethernet Kabel von der drahtlosen Bridge mit dem RJ 45 Anschluss am Injector Modul der mit Output Ausgang gekennzeichnet ist 2 Verbinden Sie ein durchgehendes nicht abgeschirmtes UTP Kabel von einem lokalen LAN Switch mit dem RJ 45 Anschluss am Injector Modul der mit Input Eingang gekennzeichnet ist Verwenden Sie
186. gent Use the snmp server location and snmp server contact commands to indicate the physical location of the access point and define a system contact To set the read only and read write community names use the snmp server community command Use the snmp server host command to define a trap receiver host and the snmp server trap command to enable or disable specific traps SMC AP config snmp server enable server 7 43 SMC AP config snmp server community alpha rw 7 42 SMC AP config snmp server community beta ro SMC AP config snmp server location WC 19 7 43 SMC AP config snmp server contact Paul 7 42 SMC AP config snmp server host 192 168 1 9 alpha 7 44 Enterprise AP config snmp server trap dot11StationAssociation 7 45 Enterprise AP config 6 44 To view the current SNMP settings use the show snmp command SMC AP show snmp 7 55 SNMP Information Service State Enable Community ro z RRR Community rw gt 2 2 2 2 3 Location WC 19 Contact Paul Engineld 80 00 07 e5 80 00 00 2e 62 00 00 00 18 EngineBoots 1 Trap Destinations 15 192 168 1 9 Community State Enabled 2 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 3 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled doti1InterfaceAGFai Enabled doti1InterfaceBFail Enabled dot11StationAssociation Enabled dot11StationAuthentication Enabled dot11StationReAssociation Enabled dot11StationRequest
187. gnal for bridge links An RSSI value of about 30 or more indicates a strong enough signal to support the maximum data rate of 54 Mbps Below a value of 30 the supported data rate would drop to lower rates A value of 15 or less indicates that the signal is weak and the antennas may require realignment 6 37 6 System Configuration The RSSI controls allow the external connector to be disabled and the receive signal for each WDS port displayed Berne A oou RSSI 802 11a Interface Interface 802 118 Interface 802 110 Interface 802 119 Interface RSSI Auto Refresh Enables or disables the refreshing of RSSI information RSSI Value The displayed RSSI value for a selected port 6 38 Advanced Configuration 6 Port Number Selects a specific WDS port for which to display the RSSI output value Ports 1 6 are available for a Master unit only port 1 for a Slave unit Default 1 Distance e Mode Indicates if the 802 11a radio is operating in normal or Turbo mode See Radio Settings A on page 6 53 Distance The approximate distance between antennas in a bridge link LED Status Mode Selects AP mode or Bridge mode Bridge Port Allows the user to select the bridge port on which to monitor traffic Default 1 Range 1 6 There are currently no equivalent CLI commands for the RSSI controls 6 39 6 System Configuration SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SN
188. gs on page 6 58 e Configuring Wi Fi Multimedia on page 6 62 Only the radio settings specific to the 802 11g interface are included in this section To configure the 802 11g radio settings select the Radio Settings page TW Radio Channel There s no 11g channel supported by this country Auto Channel Select Disable Enable Transmit Power 100 Maximum Statian Data Rete 54 Mbps Maximum Association Client 64 Antenna ID id 0x0000 module NA Antenna Control Method Diversity Antenna Location Indoor MIC Mode Hardware Software SuperG Disable Enable Radio Mode b amp g mixed mode g only mode d only mode Protection Method CTS only Preomble Length Long Short Beacon Interval 20 1000 100 TUs Data Beacon Rate DTIM 1 255 Beacons Radio Mode Selects the operating mode for the 802 11g wireless interface Default 802 11b g 802 11b g Both 802 11b and 802 11g clients can communicate with the access point up to 54 Mbps e 802 11b only Both 802 11b and 802 1 1g clients can communicate with the access point but 802 11g clients can only transfer data at 802 11b standard rates up to 11 Mbps 802 119 only Only 802 11g clients can communicate with the access point up to 54 Mbps Radio Channel The radio channel that the access point uses to communicate with wireless clients When multiple access points are deployed in the same area set the cha
189. gth 23 characters case sensitive ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you enter a community string without the ro or rw option the default is read only Example SMC AP config snmp server community alpha rw SMC AP config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None 7 42 SNMP Commands 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config snmp server contact Paul SMC AP config Related Commands snmp server location 7 43 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location lt text gt no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 c
190. h Access Category AC Although this increases data throughput it can also result in a high number of errors when traffic levels are heavy Default Acknowledge WMM BSS Parameters These parameters apply to the wireless clients WMM AP Parameters These parameters apply to the access point e logCWMin Minimum Contention Window The initial upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted The initial wait time is a random value between zero and the CWMin value Specify the CWMin value in the range 0 15 microseconds Note that the CWMin value must be equal or less than the CWMax value logCWMax Maximum Contention Window The maximum upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted The contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the CWMax value Specify the CWMax value in the range 0 15 microseconds Note that the CWMax value must be greater or equal to the CWMin value AIFS Arbitration Inter Frame Space The minimum amount of wait time before the next data transmission attempt Specify the AIFS value in the range 0 15 microseconds TXOP Limit Transmit Opportunity Limit The maximum time an AC transmit queue has access to the wireless medium When an AC queue is granted a transmit opportunity it can transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high data ra
191. h broadcasts a beacon signal including the configured SSID Wireless clients with an SSID setting of any can read the SSID from the beacon and automatically set their SSID to allow immediate connection to the nearest access point 6 70 Radio Interface 6 To improve wireless network security you have to implement two main functions e Authentication It must be verified that clients attempting to connect to the network are authorized users Traffic Encryption Data passing between the access point and clients must be protected from interception and eavesdropping For a more secure network the access point can implement one or a combination of the following security mechanisms e Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP e IEEE 802 1X e Wireless MAC address filtering e Wi Fi Protected Access WPA or WPA2 page 6 81 page 6 71 page 6 86 page 6 13 Both WEP and WPA security settings are configurable separately for each virtual access point VAP interface MAC address filtering and RADIUS server settings are global and apply to all VAP interfaces The security mechanisms that may be employed depend on the level of security required the network and management resources available and the software support provided on wireless clients A summary of wireless security considerations is listed in the following table Table 6 2 Wireless Security Considerations Security Client Support Implementation Considerations Mecha
192. haracters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config snmp server location WC 19 SMC AP config Related Commands snmp server contact 7 42 snmp server enable server This command enables SNMP management access and also enables this device to send SNMP traps i e notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP service and trap messages Syntax snmp server enable server no snmp server enable server Default Setting Enabled 7 43 7 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command enables both authentication failure notifications and link up down notifications The snmp server host command specifies the host device that will receive SNMP notifications Example SMC AP config snmp server enable server SMC AP config Related Commands snmp server host 7 44 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host lt 1 2 3 4 gt lt host_ip_address host_name gt lt community string gt no snmp server host e 1 First SNMP host 2 Second SNMP host e 3 Third SNMP host 4 Fourth SNMP host host_ip_address IP of the host the targeted recipient host_name Name of the host Range 1 63 characters e community string Password like community string sent with the notific
193. he 2 4 GHz band IEEE 802 11g includes backward compatibility with the IEEE 802 11b standard IEEE 802 11b also operates at 2 4 GHz but uses Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS and Complementary Code Keying CCK modulation technology to achieve a communication rate of up to 11 Mbps The wireless bridge provides a 54 Mbps half duplex connection for each active channel up to 108 Mbps in turbo mode on the 802 11a interface 1 1 1 Introduction Package Checklist The Dual band Outdoor Access Point Bridge package includes One Wireless Dual band Access Point SMC2890W AG or SMC2891W AG One Category 5e network PoE cable length 98 ft 30 m One power injector module and power cord 5 9 ft 1 8 m One RS232 console cable 5 9ft 1 8 m Outdoor pole and wall mounting bracket kit User Guide CD Inform your dealer if there are any incorrect missing or damaged parts If possible retain the carton including the original packing materials Use them again to repack the product in case there is a need to return it Hardware Description both models Console Port CoverAttachment Bottom View Console Port Ethernet PoE Water Tight Test Point Connector DO NOT REMOVE Integrated Antenna Top View SMC2891W AG N Type External N Type External N Type External Antenna Connector Antenna Connector Antenna Connector 2 4 GHz 5 GHz 2 4 GHz 1 2 LED Indicators 1 Top View SMC2890W AG N Type
194. he access point These enhancements include bursting compression and fast frames Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros compatible clients Default Disabled Beacon Interval The rate at which beacon signals are transmitted from the access point The beacon signals allow wireless clients to maintain contact with the access point They may also carry power management information Range 20 1000 TUs Default 100 TUs Data Beacon Rate The rate at which stations in sleep mode must wake up to receive broadcast multicast transmissions Known also as the Delivery Traffic Indication Map DTIM interval it indicates how often the MAC layer forwards broadcast multicast traffic which is necessary to wake up stations that are using Power Save mode The default value of 2 indicates that the access point will save all broadcast multicast frames for the Basic Service Set BSS and forward them after every second beacon Using smaller DTIM intervals delivers broadcast multicast frames in a more timely manner causing stations in Power Save mode to wake up more often and drain power faster Using higher DTIM values reduces the power used by stations in Power Save mode but delays the transmission of broadcast multicast frames Range 1 255 beacons Default 1 beacon 6 60 Radio Interface 6 Multicast Data Rate The maximum data rate at which the access point transmits multicast and broadcast packets on th
195. hen traffic levels are heavy Example SMC AP if wireless a wmm acknowledge policy 0 noack SMC AP if wireless a wmmparam This command configures detailed WMM parameters that apply to the access point AP or the wireless clients BSS Syntax wmmparam lt AP BSS gt lt ac_number gt lt LogCwMin gt lt LogCwMax gt lt AIFS gt lt TxOpLimit gt lt admission_control gt e AP Access Point e BSS Wireless client e ac_number Access categories ACs voice video best effort and background These categories correspond to traffic priority levels and are mapped to IEEE 802 1D priority tags as shown in Table 6 1 Range 0 3 e LogCwMin Minimum log value of the contention window This is the initial upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted The initial wait time is a random value between zero and the LogCwMin value Specify the LogCwMin value Note that the LogCwMin value must be equal or less than the LogCwMax value Range 1 15 microseconds LogCwMax Maximum log value of the contention window This is the maximum upper limit of the random backoff wait time before wireless medium access can be attempted The contention window is doubled after each detected collision up to the LogCwMax value Note that the CWMax value must be greater or equal to the LogCwMin value Range 1 15 microseconds e AIFS Arbitrary InterFrame Space specifies the minimu
196. hernet type protocol command to determine which Ethernet protocol types are to be filtered Example SMC AP config filter ethernet type enable SMC AP config Related Commands filter ethernet type protocol 7 77 filter ethernet type protocol This command sets a filter for a specific Ethernet type Use the no form to disable filtering for a specific Ethernet type Syntax filter ethernet type protocol lt protocol gt no filter ethernet type protocol lt protocol gt protocol An Ethernet protocol type Options ARP RARP Berkeley Trailer Negotiation LAN Test X25 Level 3 Banyan CDP DEC XNS DEC MOP Dump Load DEC MOP DEC LAT Ethertalk Appletalk ARP Novell IPX old Novell IPX new EAPOL Telxon TXP Aironet DDP Enet Config Test IP IPv6 NetBEUI PPPoE_Discovery PPPoE_PPP_Session Default None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the filter ethernet type enable command to enable filtering for Ethernet types specified in the filtering table or the no filter ethernet type enable command to disable all filtering based on the filtering table Example SMC AP config filter ethernet type protocol ARP SMC AP config Related Commands filter ethernet type enable 7 76 1 77 7 Command Line Interface show filters This command shows the filter options and protocol entries in the filter table Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show filters Protocol Filter
197. how snmp filter assignments command Enterprise AP config snmp server targets mytraps 192 168 1 33 chris 7 49 Enterprise AP config snmp server filter assignment mytraps trapfilter 7 51 Enterprise AP config exit Enterprise AP show snmp target 7 53 Host ID mytraps User chris IP Address 192 168 1 33 UDP Port 162 Enterprise AP show snmp filter assignments 7 54 HostID FilterID mytraps trapfilter Enterprise AP Radio Interface The IEEE 802 11a and 802 11g interfaces include configuration options for radio signal characteristics and wireless security features The configuration options are nearly identical and are therefore both covered in this section of the manual The access point can operate in three modes IEEE 802 11a only 802 11b g only or a mixed 802 11a b g mode Also note that 802 11g is backward compatible with 802 11b These interfaces are configured independently under the following web pages e Radio Interface A 802 11a e Radio Interface G 802 11b g 6 51 6 System Configuration Each radio supports up to four virtual access point VAP interfaces numbered 0 to 3 Each VAP functions as a separate access point and can be configured with its own Service Set Identification SSID and security settings However most radio signal parameters apply to all four VAP interfaces The VAPs function similar to a VLAN with each VAP mapped to its own VLAN ID Traffic to specific VAPs can be segre
198. iality using a 128 bit key The AES CCMP encryption cipher is specified as a standard requirement for WPA2 However the computational intensive operations of AES CCMP requires hardware support on client devices Therefore to implement WPA2 in the network wireless clients must be upgraded to WPA2 compliant hardware Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 multicast cipher TKIP SMC AP if wireless g mic_mode This command specifies how to calculate the Message Integrity Check MIC Syntax mic_mode lt hardware software gt hardware Uses hardware to calculate the MIC software Uses software to calculate the MIC Default Setting software Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage e The Michael Integrity Check MIC is part of the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP encryption used in Wi Fi Protected Access WPA security The MIC calculation is performed in the access point for each transmitted packet and this can impact throughput and performance The access point supports a choice of hardware or software for MIC calculation The performance of the access point can be improved by selecting the best method for the specific deployment e Using the hardware option provides best performance when the number of supported clients is less than 27 e Using the software option provides the best performance for a large number of clients on one radio interface Throughput may be reduced when b
199. ich complies with BS1362 The mains cord must be lt HAR gt or lt BASEC gt marked and be of type HO3VVF3GO 75 minimum Europe The supply plug must comply with CEE7 7 SCHUKO The mains cord must be lt HAR gt or lt BASEC gt marked and be of type HO3VVF3GO 75 minimum IEC 320 receptacle Veuillez lire a fond l information de la s curit suivante avant d installer l appareil AVERTISSEMENT l installation et la d pose de ce groupe doivent tre confi s a un personnel qualifi Ne branchez pas votre appareil sur une prise secteur alimentation lectrique lorsqu il n y a pas de connexion de mise a la terre mise a la masse Vous devez raccorder ce groupe a une sortie mise a la terre mise a la masse afin de respecter les normes internationales de s curit e Le coupleur d appareil le connecteur du groupe et non pas la prise murale doit respecter une configuration qui permet un branchement sur une entr e d appareil EN 60320 IEC 320 La prise secteur doit se trouver a proximit de l appareil et son acc s doit tre facile Vous ne pouvez mettre l appareil hors circuit qu en d branchant son cordon lectrique au niveau de cette prise L appareil fonctionne a une tension extr mement basse de s curit qui est conforme a la norme IEC 60950 Ces conditions ne sont maintenues que si l equipement auquel il est raccord fonctionne dans les m mes conditions France et
200. idge link Note The power injector module does not support Power over Ethernet PoE based on the IEEE 802 3af standard The wireless bridge unit must always be powered on by being connected to the power injector module Power Injector Module The wireless bridge receives power through its network cable connection using power over Ethernet technology A power injector module is included in the wireless bridge package and provides two RJ 45 Ethernet ports one for connecting to the wireless bridge Output and the other for connecting to a local LAN switch Input The Input port uses an MDI i e internal straight through pin configuration You can therefore use straight through twisted pair cable to connect this port to most network interconnection devices such as a switch or router that provide MDI X ports However when connecting the access point to a workstation or other device that does not have MDI X ports you must use crossover twisted pair cable LED Indicator AC Power Socket Pa Hidden Input Output w 4 Ethernet from Ethernet and Power Local Network to Wireless Bridge The wireless bridge does not have a power switch It is powered on when its Ethernet port is connected to the power injector module and the power injector module is connected to an AC power source The power injector includes one LED indicator that turns on when AC power is applied 1 6 Grounding Poi
201. ied in the sequence that they are defined CLI Commands for Configuring SNMPv3 Trap Filters To create a notification filter use the snmp server filter command from the CLI configuration mode Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter that includes or excludes multiple MIB objects To view the current SNMP filters use the show snmp filter command from the CLI Exec mode Enterprise AP config snmp server filter trapfilter include 1 7 50 Enterprise AP config snmp server filter trapfilter exclude 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 23 Enterprise AP config exit Enterprise AP show snmp filter 7 53 Filter trapfilter Type include Subtree iso Type exclude Subtree iso 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 23 Enterprise AP 6 49 6 System Configuration Configuring SNMPv3 Targets An SNMP v3 notification Target ID is specified by the SNMP v3 user IP address and UDP port A user defined filter can also be assigned to specific targets to limit the notifications received to specific MIB objects Note that the filter must first be configured See Configuring SNMPv3 Trap Filters on page 6 48 To configure a new notification receiver target click the New button A new page opens to configure the settings see below To edit an existing target select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then click the Edit button To delete targets select the radio button next to the entry in the table and then cli
202. ilter or remove a subtree from a filter Syntax snmp server filter lt filter id gt lt include exclude gt lt subtree gt mask mask no snmp server filter lt filter id gt subtree filter id A user defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter Maximum length 32 characters e include Defines a filter type that includes objects in the MIB subtree exclude Defines a filter type that excludes objects in the MIB subtree subtree The part of the MIB subtree that is to be filtered e mask An optional hexadecimal value bit mask to define objects in the MIB subtree Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point allows up to 10 notification filters to be created Each filter can be defined by up to 20 MIB subtree ID entries Use the command more than once with the same filter ID to build a filter that includes or excludes multiple MIB objects Note that the filter entries are applied in the sequence that they are defined e The MIB subtree must be defined in the form 1 3 6 1 and always start with a The mask is a hexadecimal value with each bit masking the corresponding ID in the MIB subtree A 1 in the mask indicates an exact match and a 0 indicates a wild card For example a mask value of OxFFBF provides a bit mask 1111 1111 1011 1111 If applied to the subtree 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 23 the zero corresponds to the
203. interfaces 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 shutdown SMC AP if wireless g 7 112 show interface wireless This command displays the status for Syntax Wireless Interface Commands 7 the wireless interface show interface wireless lt a g gt vap id a 802 11a radio interface e g 802 11g radio interface vap id The number that identifies the VAP interface Options 0 3 Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show interface wireless g Wireless Interface Information 0 Identification Description SSID Channel Status MAC Address Radio Mode Protection Method Transmit Power Max Station Data Rate Multicast Data Rate Fragmentation Threshold RTS Threshold Beacon Interval Authentication Timeout Interval Association Timeout Interval DTIM Interval Preamble Length Maximum Association MIC Mode Super G VLAN ID Closed System Multicast cipher Unicast cipher WPA clients WPA Key Mgmt Mode WPA PSK Key Type WPA PSK Key PMKSA Lifetime Encryption Default Transmit Key Common Static Keys Pre Authentication Authentication Type Enterprise 802 11g Access Point VAP_TEST_11G 0 1 AUTO ENABLED 00 03 7 fe 03 02 b amp g mixed mode CTS only FULL 16 dBm 54Mbps 5 5Mbps 2346 bytes 2347 bytes 100 TUs 60 Mins 30 Mins 1 beacon LONG 64 stations Software Disabled Disabled WEP TKIP and AES DISABLED PRE SHARED KEY
204. interval between transmitting accounting GC 7 63 timeout interim updates to the RADIUS server radius server Sets the format for specifying MAC addresses onthe GC 7 64 radius mac format RADIUS server radius server vian format Sets the format for specifying VLAN IDs on the GC 7 64 RADIUS server show radius Shows the current RADIUS settings Exec 7 65 radius server address This command specifies the primary and secondary RADIUS servers Syntax radius server secondary address lt host_ip_address host_name gt secondary Secondary server host_ip_address IP address of server host_name Host name of server Range 1 20 characters Default Setting None 7 60 RADIUS Client 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config radius server address 192 168 1 25 SMC AP config radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Syntax radius server secondary port lt port_number gt secondary Secondary server port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1024 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config radius server port 181 SMC AP config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Syntax radius server secondary key lt key_string gt secondary Secondary server e key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon ac
205. ions as described below Note that this page is automatically refreshed every five seconds Station Address The MAC address of the wireless client Authenticated Shows if the station has been authenticated The two basic methods of authentication supported for 802 11 wireless networks are open system and shared key Open system authentication accepts any client attempting to connect to the access point without verifying its identity The shared key approach uses Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP to verify client identity by distributing a shared key to stations before attempting authentication Associated Shows if the station has been successfully associated with the access point Once authentication is completed stations can associate with the current access point or reassociate with a new access point The association procedure allows the wireless system to track the location of each mobile client and ensure that frames destined for each client are forwarded to the appropriate access point Forwarding Allowed Shows if the station has passed 802 1X authentication and is now allowed to forward traffic to the access point e Key Type Displays one of the following e WEP Disabled The client is not using Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP encryption keys Dynamic The client is using Wi Fi Protected Access 802 1X or pre shared key mode or using 802 1X authentication with dynamic keying Static The clie
206. ired minimum clearance above the ground or path obstruction 3 2 Radio Path Planning 3 Total Link Distance Max Clearance for Approximate Total Clearance 60 of First Fresnel Clearance for Required at Zone at 5 8 GHz Earth Curvature Mid point of Link 0 25 mile 402 m 4 5 ft 1 4 m 0 4 5 ft 1 4 m 0 5 mile 805 m 6 4 ft 1 95 m 0 6 4 ft 1 95 m 1 mile 1 6 km 9 ft 2 7 m 0 9 ft 2 7 m 2 miles 3 2 km 12 7 ft 3 9 m 0 12 7 ft 3 9 m 3 miles 4 8 km 15 6 ft 4 8 m 1 8 ft 0 5 m 17 4 ft 5 3 m 4 miles 6 4 km 18 ft 5 5 m 3 2 ft 1 0 m 21 2 ft 6 5 m 5 miles 8 km 20 ft 6 1 m 5 ft 1 5 m 25 ft 7 6 m 7 miles 11 3 km 24 ft 7 3 m 9 8 ft 3 0 m 33 8 ft 10 3 m 9 miles 14 5 km 27 ft 8 2 m 16 ft 4 9 m 43 ft 13 1 m 12 miles 19 3 km 31 ft 9 5 m 29 ft 8 8 m 60 ft 18 3 m 15 miles 24 1 km 35 ft 10 7 m 45 ft 13 7 m 80 ft 24 4 m 17 miles 27 4 km 37 ft 11 3 m 58 ft 17 7 m 95 ft 29 m Note that to avoid any obstruction along the path the height of the object must be added to the minimum clearance required for a clear radio line of sight Consider the following simple example illustrated in the figure below Visual Line of Sight Radio Line of Sight k 3 miles 4 8 km 20m A wireless bridge link is deployed to connect building A to a building B which is located three miles 4 8 km away Mid wa
207. is command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments Syntax show snmp filter assignments Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show snmp filter assignments HostID FilterID mytraps trapfilter SMC AP 7 54 SNMP Commands 7 show snmp This command displays the SNMP configuration settings Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show snmp SNMP Information Service State Enable Community ro pK RK Community rw pk KKK Location WC 19 Contact Paul Engineld 80 00 07 e5 80 00 00 2e 62 00 00 00 18 EngineBoots 1 Trap Destinations 13 192 168 1 9 Community State Enabled 2 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 33 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled 4 0 0 0 0 Community State Disabled dotllinterfaceAGFail Enabled dotllInterfaceBFail Enabled dot11StationAssociation Enabled dot11StationAuthentication Enabled dot11StationReAssociation Enabled dot11StationRequestFail Enabled dotlxAuthFail Enabled dotlxAuthNotInitiated Enabled dotixAuthSuccess Enabled dot1xMacAddrAuthFail Enabled dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled iappContextDataSent Enabled iappStationRoamedFrom Enabled iappStationRoamedTo Enabled localMacAddrAuthFail Enabled localMacAddrAuthSuccess Enabled pppLogonFail Enabled sntpServerFail Enabled configFileVersionChanged Enabled radiusServerChanged Enabled systemDown Enabled systemUp Enabled SMC AP 7 55 7 Command Line Inte
208. ius server key radius server retransmit radius server timeout radius server port accounting radius server timeout interim radius server radius mac format radius server vlan format show radius 802 1X Authentication 802 1x 802 1x broadcast key refresh rate 802 1x session key refresh rate 802 1x session timeout 802 1x supplicant enable 802 1x supplicant user show authentication MAC Address Authentication address filter default address filter entry address filter delete mac authentication server mac authentication session timeout Filtering Commands filter local bridge filter ap manage filter uplink enable filter uplink filter ethernet type enable filter ethernet type protocol show filters WDS Bridge Commands bridge mode bridge role WDS bridge channel auto sync bridge link parent bridge link child bridge dynamic entry age time show bridge aging time Contents 7 57 7 58 7 59 7 59 7 60 7 60 7 61 7 61 7 62 7 62 7 63 7 63 7 64 7 64 7 65 7 66 7 66 7 67 7 68 7 68 7 69 7 69 7 70 7 71 7 71 7 72 7 72 7 73 7 73 7 74 7 75 7 75 7 76 7 76 7 76 7 77 7 78 7 78 7 79 7 79 7 80 7 80 7 81 7 82 7 82 xiii Contents xiv show bridge filter entry show bridge link Spanning Tree Commands bridge stp enable bridge stp forwarding delay bridge stp hello time bridge stp max age bridge stp priority bridge link path cost bridge link port priority show bridge stp Ethernet Interface Commands
209. key 802 1x WPA WPA2 Interface Detail Settings Local or Disabled Yes Mixed Mode Authentication WPA WPA2 mixed Encryption Enable PA Configuration Required pher Suite TKIP 802 1x Required et 802 1x key refresh and reauthentication rates OS wn WPA WPA2 Mixed Interface Detail Settings Local or Disabled No Mode Pre Shared Key Authentication WPA WPA2 PSK mixed Encryption Enable WPA Configuration Required Cipher Suite TKIP 802 1x Disable PA Pre shared Key Type Hexadicmal or phanumeric Enter a WPA Pre shared key gt a The configuration summary does not include the set up for MAC authentication see page 4 15 or RADIUS server see page 2 9 b The configuration of RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802 1x WPA or WPA Pre shared Key is not supported c RADIUS server required only when RADIUS MAC authentication is configured Note If you choose to configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802 1X the RADIUS MAC address authentication occurs prior to 802 1X authentication Only when RADIUS MAC authentication succeeds is 802 1X authentication performed When RADIUS MAC authentication fails 802 1X authentication is not performed 6 74 Radio Interface 6 Enabling the VAPs Before enabling the Virtual Access Point VAP radio interfaces first configure all of the relevant raido settings see Radio Settings A 802 11a on page 6 53 or Radio Settings G
210. koff and wait time and therefore more transmit opportunities To configure WMM select the Radio Settings page and scroll down to the WMM configuration settings Acknowledge O No Acknowledge Acknowledge O No Acknowledge Acknowledge O No Acknowledge Acknowledge O No Acknowledge 4 3 2 Z Z z z z 3 z zs i 5 i a A E 2 10 10 4 3 3 7 2 2 0 0 94 4 Disable O Enable Disable O Enable Disable O Enable Disable O Enable WMM AP Parameters 4 4 3 2 6 10 4 i 3 7 1 1 0 0 9 47 Disable O Enable disable O Enable Disable O Enable Disable O Enable 6 6 gt Radio Interface 6 WMM Sets the WMM operational mode on the access point When enabled the parameters for each AC queue will be employed on the access point and QoS capabilities are advertised to WMM enabled clients Default Support e Disable WMM is disabled e Support WMM will be used for any associated device that supports this feature Devices that do not support this feature may still associate with the access point Required WMM must be supported on any device trying to associated with the access point Devices that do not support this feature will not be allowed to associate with the access point WMM Acknowledge Policy By default all wireless data transmissions require the sender to wait for an acknowledgement from the receiver WMM allows the acknowledgement wait time to be turned off for eac
211. kup restore Orr TFP Export Import syscig must be syschg Start Export Import Before upgrading new software verify that the access point is connected to the network and has been configured with a compatible IP address and subnet mask If you need to download from an FTP or TFTP server take the following additional steps Obtain the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server where the access point software is stored If upgrading from an FTP server be sure that you have an account configured on the server with a user name and password If VLANs are configured on the access point determine the VLAN ID with which the FTP or TFTP server is associated and then configure the management station or the network port to which it is attached with the same VLAN ID If you are managing the access point from a wireless client the VLAN ID for the wireless client must be configured on a RADIUS server Current version Version number of runtime code 6 30 Advanced Configuration 6 Firmware Upgrade Local Downloads an operation code image file from the web management station to the access point using HTTP Use the Browse button to locate the image file locally on the management station and click Start Upgrade to proceed New firmware file Specifies the name of the code file on the server The new firmware file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and
212. l antenna options and is designed to operate as the root bridge in point to multipoint configurations supporting wireless bridge connections to as many as six units Note Both models can be set to operate in either root bridge or bridge node mode Each model is housed in a weatherproof enclosure for mounting outdoors and includes its own brackets for attaching to a wall pole radio mast or tower structure The unit is powered through its Ethernet cable connection from a power injector module that is installed indoors The wireless bridge system offers a fast reliable and cost effective solution for connectivity between remote Ethernet wired LANs or to provide Internet access to an isolated site The system is also easy to install and operate ideal for situations where a wired link may be difficult or expensive to deploy The wireless bridge connection provides data rates of up to 108 Mbps In addition both wireless bridge models offer full network management capabilities through an easy to use web interface a command line interface and support for Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP tools Radio Characteristics The IEEE 802 11a and 802 11g standards use a radio modulation technique known as Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM and a shared collision domain CSMA CA The 802 11a standard operates in the 5 GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure UNII band and the 802 119 standard in t
213. l lightning protection use lightning rods lightning arrestors or surge suppressors Note The Ethernet cable included with the package is 30 m 100 ft long 4 6 Connect the Power Injector ZL Console Port PoE Ethernet Port EN _ J G AN ic Ground Wire Grounding Screw u AA Ethernet Cable g 7 A y 4 e i Connect the Power Injector To connect the wireless bridge to a power source Caution Do not install the power injector outdoors The unit is for indoor installation only Caution Install lightning protection at the power injector end of the Ethernet cable use a lightning arrestor immediately before the cable enters the building Note The wireless bridge s Ethernet port does not support Power over Ethernet PoE based on the IEEE 802 3af standard Do not try to power the unit by connecting it directly to a network switch that provides IEEE 802 3af PoE Always connect the unit to the included power injector module Connect the Ethernet cable from the wireless bridge to the RJ 45 port labeled Output on the power injector Connect a straight through unshielded twisted pair UTP cable from a local LAN switch to the RJ 45 port labeled Input on the power injector Use Category 5e or better UTP cable for 10 100BASE TX connections Note The RJ 45 port on the power injector is an MDI port If connecting directly to a computer for testing the link use a crossover cable 4 7 4 Hardware
214. lation The bridge s mounting bracket has four parts One rectangular plate that is used for pole and wall mounting one square plate that attaches directly to the bridge and two plates that form an adjustable V shaped clamp for pole mounting Mounting on a Pole Perform the following steps to mount the unit to a 1 5 to 2 inch diameter steel pole or tube using the mounting bracket 1 3 4 2 Fit the edges of the V shaped clamp parts into the slots on the flat side of the rectangular plate The inner slots are for a 1 5 inch diameter pole and the outer slots for a 2 inch diameter pole Place the V shaped clamp parts of the bracket around the pole and tighten the securing nuts just enough to hold the bracket to the pole The bracket may need to be rotated around the pole during the antenna alignment process Fit the edges of the V shaped part into the slots Tighten the securing bolts Attach the square mounting plate to the bridge with the supplied screws Mount the Unit 4 J FT Attach the A mt adjustable u rectangular plate to the bridge with supplied screws e a Attach the bridge with its mounting plate to the bracket already fixed to the pole Attach the bridge to the plate on the pole Use the included nuts to secure the wireless bridge to the pole bracket Note that the wireless bridge tilt angle may need to be adjusted during the antenna alignment process 4 3 4
215. less communications through the access point Use the filter ap manage command to restrict management access from wireless clients To configure Ethernet protocol filtering use the filter ethernet type enable command to enable filtering and the filter ethernet type protocol command to define the protocols that you want to filter To remove an entry from the table use the address filter delete command To display the current settings use the show filters command from the Exec mode SMC AP config filter local bridge 7 75 SMC AP config filter ap manage 7 75 SMC AP config filter uplink enable 7 76 SMC AP config filter uplink add 00 12 34 56 78 9a 7 76 SMC AP config filter ethernet type enable 7 76 SMC AP config filter ethernet type protocol ARP 7 77 SMC AP config exit SMC AP show filters 7 78 Protocol Filter Information Local Bridge ENABLED AP Management ENABLED Ethernet Type Filter ENABLED Enabled Protocol Filters SMC AP 6 18 Advanced Configuration 6 VLAN The access point can employ VLAN tagging support to control access to network resources and increase security VLANs separate traffic passing between the access point associated clients and the wired network There can be a VLAN assigned to each associated client a default VLAN for each VAP Virtual Access Point interface and a management VLAN for the access point Note the following points about the access point s VLAN support
216. lient Security Association SA that the VAP holds in a cache When the lifetime expires the security association and keys are deleted from the cache If the client returns to an access point after the association has been deleted it will require full re authentication Range 1 1440 minutes Default 720 minutes 6 54 Radio Interface 6 CLI Commands for the Configuring the VAPs From the global configuration mode enter the interface wireless a command to access the 802 11a radio interface From the 802 11a interface mode you can access radio settings that apply to all VAP interfaces To access a specific VAP interface numbered 0 to 3 use the vap command You can configure a name for each interface using the description command You can also use the closed system command to stop sending the SSID in beacon messages Set any other VAP parameters and radio setting as required before enabling the VAP interface with the no shutdown command To view the current 802 11a radio settings for the VAP interface use the show interface wireless a 0 3 command as shown on 7 97 SMC AP if wireless a vap 0 7 97 SMC AP if wireless a VAP 0 description RD AP 3 7 109 SMC AP if wireless a VAP 0 vlan id 1 7 136 SMC AP if wireless a VAP 0 closed system 7 110 Enterprise AP if wireless a VAP 0 authentication timeout interval 30 7 111 Enterprise AP if wireless a VAP 0 association timeout interval 20 7 111 SMC AP if wireless a VAP 0
217. m amount of wait time before the next data transmission attempt Range 1 15 microseconds e TXOPLimit Transmission Opportunity Limit specifies the maximum time an AC transmit queue has access to the wireless medium When an AC queue is granted a transmit opportunity it can transmit data for a time up to the TxOpLimit This data bursting greatly improves the efficiency for high data rate traffic Range 0 65535 microseconds 7 139 7 Command Line Interface e admission_control The admission control mode for the access category When enabled clients are blocked from using the access category Options 0 to disable 1 to enable Default AP Parameters WMM Parameters ACO Best Effort AC1 Background AC2 Video AC3 Voice LogCwMin 4 4 3 2 LogCwMax 10 10 4 3 AIFS 3 7 2 2 TXOP Limit 0 0 94 47 Admission Control Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled BSS Parameters WMM Parameters ACO BestEffort AC1 Background AC2 Video AC3 Voice LogCwMin 4 4 3 2 LogCwMax 6 10 4 3 AIFS 3 7 1 1 TXOP Limit 0 0 94 47 Admission Control Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Example SMC AP if wireless a wmmparams ap 0 46311 SMC AP if wireless a 7 140 Appendix A Troubleshooting Check the following items before you contact local Technical Support 1 If wireless clients cannot ac
218. m will be enabled The access points contending for the medium may not be aware of each other The RTS CTS mechanism can solve this Hidden Node Problem Range 0 2347 bytes Default 2347 bytes 6 61 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for the Common Radio Settings From the global configuration mode enter the interface wireless a command to access the 802 11a radio interface From the 802 11a interface mode you can access radio settings that apply to all VAP interfaces Use the turbo command to enable this feature before setting the radio channel with the channel command Set any other radio setting as required before enabling the VAP interface with the no shutdown command To view the current 802 11a radio settings for the VAP interface use the show interface wireless a 0 3 command as shown on 7 97 SMC AP config interface wireless a 7 90 Enter Wireless configuration commands one per line SMC AP if wireless a turbo 7 98 SMC AP if wireless a channel 42 7 100 SMC AP if wireless a transmit power full 7 100 SMC AP if wireless a speed 9 7 98 SMC AP if wireless a antenna id 0000 7 103 SMC AP if wireless a antenna control right 7 103 SMC AP if wireless a antenna location indoor 7 104 SMC AP if wireless a mic_mode hardware 7 127 SMC AP if wireless a super a 7 108 Enterprise AP if wireless a beacon interval 150 7 105 Enterprise AP if wireless a beacon interval 150 7 105 SMC AP if wireless a dtim period 5 7 105
219. mand Usage The current 802 11 standard does not specify the signaling required between access points in order to support clients roaming from one access point to another In particular this can create a problem for clients roaming between access points from different vendors This command is used to enable or disable 802 11f handover signaling between different access points especially in a multi vendor environment Example SMC AP config iapp SMC AP config 7 134 VLAN Commands 7 VLAN Commands The access point can enable the support of VLAN tagged traffic passing between wireless clients and the wired network Up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific wireless clients allowing users to remain within the same VLAN as they move around a campus site When VLAN is enabled on the access point a VLAN ID a number between 1 and 4094 can be assigned to each client after successful authentication using IEEE 802 1X and a central RADIUS server The user VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for each user authorized to access the network If a user does not have a configured VLAN ID the access point assigns the user to its own configured native VLAN ID Caution When VLANs are enabled the access point s Ethernet port drops all received traffic that does not include a VLAN tag To maintain network connectivity to the access point and wireless clients be sure that the access point is connected to a device port on a
220. minutes AP Scan Duration Sets the length of time for each rogue AP scan A long scan duration time will detect more access points in the area but causes more disruption to client access Range 100 1000 milliseconds Default 350 milliseconds e Rogue AP Authenticate Enables or disables RADIUS authentication Enabling RADIUS Authentication allows the access point to discover rogue access points With RADIUS authentication enabled the access point checks the MAC address Basic Service Set Identifier BSSID of each access point that it finds against a RADIUS server to determine whether the access point is allowed With RADIUS authentication disabled the access point can detect its neighboring access points only it cannot identify whether the access points are allowed or are rogues If you enable RADIUS authentication you must configure a RADIUS server for this access point See RADIUS on page 6 7 Scan AP Now Starts an immediate rogue AP scan on the radio interface Default Disable Note While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point Therefore avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP CLI Commands for Rogue AP Detection From the global configuration mode enter the interface wireless command to access the 802 11a or 802 11g radio inte
221. mission Control No TXOP Limit 0 000 ms AC2 Video logCwMin 3 ogCwMax 4 AIFSN 1 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 3 008 ms AC3 Voice logCwMin 2 ogCwMax 3 AIFSN 1 Admission Control No TXOP Limit 1 504 ms SMC AP Radio Settings G 802 11g The IEEE 802 11g standard operates within the 2 4 GHz band at up to 54 Mbps Also note that because the IEEE 802 11g standard is an extension of the IEEE 802 11b standard it allows clients with 802 11b wireless network cards to associate to an 802 11g access point First configure the radio settings that apply to the individual VAPs Virtual Access Point and the common radio settings that apply to all of the 802 11g interfaces After you have configured the radio settings go to the Security page under the 802 g Interface See Security on page 6 70 enable the radio service for any of the VAP interfaces and then set an SSID to identify the wireless network service provided by each VAP Remember that only clients with the same SSID can associate with a VAP Note You must first enable VAP interface 0 before the other interfaces can be enabled 6 68 Radio Interface 6 Most of the 802 11g commands are identical to those used by the 802 11a interface For information on the these commands refer to the following sections e Configuring VAP Radio Settings on page 6 53 Configuring Rogue AP Detection on page 6 55 e Configuring Common Radio Settin
222. mple SMC AP if wireless g multicast data rate 5 5 SMC AP if wireless g 7 99 7 Command Line Interface channel This command configures the radio channel through which the access point communicates with wireless clients Syntax channel lt channel auto gt e channel Manually sets the radio channel used for communications with wireless clients Range for 802 11a 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 149 153 157 161 165 for normal mode and 42 50 58 152 160 for turbo mode Range for 802 11b g 1 to 14 auto Automatically selects an unoccupied channel if available Otherwise the lowest channel is selected Default Setting Automatic channel selection Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage e The available channel settings are limited by local regulations which determine the number of channels that are available When multiple access points are deployed in the same area be sure to choose a channel separated by at least two channels for 802 11a to avoid having the channels interfere with each other and at least five channels for 802 11b g You can deploy up to four access points in the same area for 802 11a e g channels 36 56 149 165 and three access points for 802 1 1b g e g channels 1 6 11 For most wireless adapters the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that used by the access point to which it is linked Example
223. must be set to WEP WEP is the first generation security protocol used to encrypt data crossing the wireless medium using a fairly short key Communicating devices must use the same WEP key to encrypt and decrypt radio signals WEP has many security flaws and is not recommended for transmitting highly sensitive data TKIP provides data encryption enhancements including per packet key hashing i e changing the encryption key on each packet a message integrity check an extended initialization vector with sequencing rules and are keying mechanism Select TKIP if there are clients in the network that are not WPA2 compliant TKIP defends against attacks on WEP in which the unencrypted initialization vector in encrypted packets is used to calculate the WEP key TKIP changes the encryption key on each packet and rotates not just the unicast keys but the broadcast keys as well TKIP is a replacement for WEP that removes the predictability that intruders relied on to determine the WEP key Wireless Security Commands 7 e AES CCMP Advanced Encryption Standard Counter Mode CBCMAC Protocol WPA2 is backward compatible with WPA including the same 802 1X and PSK modes of operation and support for TKIP encryption The main enhancement is its use of AES Counter Mode encryption with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code CBC MAC for message integrity The AES Counter Mode CBCMAC Protocol AES CCMP provides extremely robust data confident
224. n 05 40 59 Information Jet time from Jet time from S HCP Client Jet time from Jet time from DHCP Client Jet time from et time from Si jet time from Si Set time from 3NTP Server Fail NTP Server Fail Send Discover INTP Server Fail SNTP Server Fail Send Discover DHCP lent Senc SNTP Server Fail Status Information 6 Event Level The logging level associated with this message For a description of the various levels see logging level on page 6 33 Event Message The content of the log message Error Messages An example of a logged error message is Station Failed to authenticate unsupported algorithm This message may be caused by any of the following conditions Access point was set to Open Authentication but a client sent an authentication request frame with a Shared key Access point was set to Shared Key Authentication but a client sent an authentication frame for Open System WEP keys do not match When the access point uses Shared Key Authentication but the key used by client and access point are not the same the frame will be decrypted incorrectly using the wrong algorithm and sequence number 6 93 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for Displaying the Logging Status From the global configuration mode use the show logging command SMC AP show loggging 7 33 Logging Information Syslog State
225. n Range 0 14400 minutes Default Setting 720 minutes 7 128 Wireless Security Commands 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage e WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security information in a cache so that if a client roams away from an access point and then returns reauthentication is not required e When a WPA2 client is first authenticated it receives a Pairwise Master Key PMk that is used to generate other keys for unicast data encryption This key and other client information form a Security Association that the access point names and holds in a cache The lifetime of this security association can be configured with this command When the lifetime expires the client security association and keys are deleted from the cache If the client returns to the access point it requires full reauthentication The access point can store up to 256 entries in the PMKSA cache Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 wpa pre shared key ASCII agoodsecret SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 pre authentication This command enables WPA2 pre authentication for fast secure roaming Syntax pre authentication lt enable disable gt enable Enables pre authentication for the VAP interface disable Disables pre authentication for the VAP interface Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage e
226. n IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets You can manually configure a specific IP address using this command or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using the ip dhcp command Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program Example SMC AP config interface ethernet Enter Ethernet configuration commands one per line SMC AP if ethernet ip address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 253 SMC AP if ethernet Related Commands ip dhcp 7 92 ip dhcp This command enables the access point to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip dhcp no ip dhcp Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the access point to existing IP subnets You can manually configure a specific IP address using the ip address command or direct the device to obtain an address from a DHCP server using this command 7 92 Ethernet Interface Commands 7 When you use this command the access point will begin broadcasting DHCP client requests The current IP address i e default or manually configured address will continue
227. nable server Enables SNMP service and traps GC 7 43 snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification GC 7 44 operation snmp server trap Enables specific SNMP notifications GC 7 45 snmp server engine id Sets the engine ID for SNMP v3 GC 7 46 snmp server user Sets the name of the SNMP v3 user GC 7 47 snmp server targets Configures SNMP v3 notification targets GC 7 49 snmp server filter Configures SNMP v3 notification filters GC 7 50 snmp server Assigns SNMP v3 notification filters to targets GC 7 51 filter assignments show snmp groups Displays the pre defined SNMP v3 groups Exec 7 51 show snmp users Displays SNMP v3 user Settings Exec 7 52 show snmp Displays the assignment of users to SNMP v3 groups Exec 7 52 group assignments show snmp target Displays the SNMP v3 notification targets Exec 7 53 show snmp filter Displays the SNMP v3 notification filters Exec 7 53 show snmp Displays the SNMP v3 notification filter assignments Exec 7 54 filter assignments show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications Exec 7 55 7 41 7 Command Line Interface snmp server community This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network Management Protocol Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community string string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum len
228. nd Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 7 30 logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive GC 7 30 logging messages logging console Initiates logging of error messages to the console GC 7 31 logging level Defines the minimum severity level for event logging GC 7 31 logging facility type Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog GC 7 32 messages logging clear Clears all log entries in access point memory GC 7 33 show logging Displays the state of logging Exec 7 33 show event log Displays all log entries in access point memory Exec 7 34 7 29 7 Command Line Interface logging on This command controls logging of error messages i e sending debug or error messages to memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to memory You can use the logging level command to control the type of error messages that are stored in memory Example SMC AP config logging on SMC AP config logging host This command specifies syslog servers host that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove syslog server host Syntax logging host lt 1 2 3 4 gt lt host_name host_ip_address gt udp_porf no logging host lt 1 2 3 4 gt 1 First syslog server 2 Second syslog s
229. nd while in Global Configuration mode The system prompt will change to SMC AP if ethernet or SMC AP if wireless indicating that you have access privileges to the associated commands You can use the end command to return to the Exec mode SMC AP config interface ethernet SMC AP if ethernet 1 5 7 Command Line Interface Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 7 1 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Chrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctri B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates a task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes from cursor to the end of the command line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Shows the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes the entire line Ctrl W Deletes the last
230. ng Software from a TFTP Server Use the copy tftp file command from the Exec mode and then specify the file type name and IP address of the TFTP server When the download is complete the dir command can be used to check that the new file is present in the access point file system To run the new software use the reset board command to reboot the access point SMC AP copy tftp file 7 57 1 Application image 2 Config file 3 Boot block image Select the type of download lt 1 2 3 gt Liszt TFTP Source file name img bin TFTP Server IP 192 168 2 29 SMC AP dir 7 59 File Name Type File Size dflt img bin 2 1319939 img bin 2 1629577 syscfg 5 17776 syscfg_bak 5 17776 262144 byte s available SMC AP reset board 7 10 Reboot system now lt y n gt y 6 32 Advanced Configuration 6 System Log The access point can be configured to send event and error messages to a System Log Server The system clock can also be synchronized with a time server so that all the messages sent to the Syslog server are stamped with the correct time and date if System Log System Log Setup Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable O Enable Disable O Enable Disable O Enable Informational 2 5 g Disable Enable 137 92 140 80 192 43 244 18 Set Time Zone Enter Time Zone GMT 05 Eastern Time US amp Canade x O Enable Daylight Saving From JAN E
231. nient wireless solution for many applications This chapter describes the role of Dual band Outdoor Access Point Bridge in various wireless network configurations Access Point Topologies Operating as an outdoor access point the unit is deployed in an integrated configuration with wired Ethernet LANs providing network access to wireless stations in the wireless coverage area The access point s radios can support these modes e Infrastructure wireless LAN e Infrastructure wireless LAN with roaming e Point to point bridge link e Point to multipoint bridge links The 802 11b and 802 11g frequency band which operates at 2 4 GHz can easily encounter interference from other 2 4 GHz devices such as other 802 11b org wireless devices cordless phones and microwave ovens If you experience poor wireless LAN performance try the following measures e Limit any possible sources of radio interference within the service area e Increase the distance between neighboring access points e Increase the channel separation of neighboring access points e g up to 3 channels of separation for 802 11b or up to 5 channels for 802 119 2 1 2 Network Configuration Infrastructure Wireless LAN The access point function of the wireless bridge provides access to a wired LAN for 802 11a b g wireless workstations An integrated wired wireless LAN is called an Infrastructure configuration A Basic Service Set BSS consists of a group of wireless
232. nism WEP Built in support on all 802 11a Provides only weak security and 802 119 devices Requires manual key management WEP over 802 1X Requires 802 1X client support in system or by add in software Support provided in Windows 2000 SP 3 or later and Windows XP Provides dynamic key rotation for improved WEP security Requires configured RADIUS server 802 1X EAP type may require management of digital certificates for clients and server MAC Address Filtering Uses the MAC address of client network card Provides only weak user authentication Management of authorized MAC addresses Can be combined with other methods for improved security Optionally configured RADIUS server WPA over 802 1X Mode Requires WPA enabled system and network card driver native support provided in Windows XP Provides robust security in WPA only mode i e WPA clients only Offers support for legacy WEP clients but with increased security risk i e WEP authentication keys disabled Requires configured RADIUS server 802 1X EAP type may require management of digital certificates for clients and server 6 71 6 System Configuration Table 6 2 Wireless Security Considerations Security Mechanism Client Support Implementation Considerations WPA PSK Mode Requires WPA enabled system and network card driver native support provided in Windows XP Provides good s
233. njector Align Antennas Chapter 5 Initial Configuration Initial Setup through the CLI Required Connections Initial Configuration Steps Logging In Chapter 6 System Configuration Advanced Configuration System Identification TCP IP Settings RADIUS SSH Settings Authentication Filter Control VLAN WDS Settings AP Management Administration System Log RSSI SNMP Configuring SNMP and Trap Message Parameters Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Trap Filters Configuring SNMPv3 Targets Radio Interface Radio Settings A 802 11a Radio Settings G 802 119 Security Status Information Access Point Status Station Status Event Logs STP Status 4 4 4 5 4 7 4 8 5 1 5 1 5 2 5 3 6 1 Contents Chapter 7 Command Line Interface 7 1 Using the Command Line Interface 7 1 Accessing the CLI 7 1 Console Connection 7 1 Telnet Connection 7 1 Entering Commands 7 2 Keywords and Arguments 7 2 Minimum Abbreviation 7 2 Command Completion 7 3 Getting Help on Commands 7 3 Partial Keyword Lookup 7 4 Negating the Effect of Commands 7 4 Using Command History 7 4 Understanding Command Modes 7 4 Exec Commands 7 5 Configuration Commands 7 5 Command Line Processing 7 6 Command Groups 7 6 General Commands 7 7 configure 7 8 end 7 8 exit 7 8 ping 7 9 reset 7 10 show history 7 10 show line 7 11 System Management Commands 7 11 country 7 12 prompt 7 14 system name 7 14 username 7 15 password 7 15 ip ssh server enable 7 1
234. nnel Status MAC Address Radio Mode Transmit Power Max Station Data Rate Multicast Data Rate Fragmentation Threshold RTS Threshold Beacon Interval Authentication Timeout Interval Association Timeout Interval DTIM Interval Preamble Length Maximum Association MIC Mode Super G VLAN ID Closed System Multicast cipher Unicast cipher WPA clients WPA Key Mgmt Mode WPA PSK Key Type WPA PSK Key PMKSA Lifetime Encryption Default Transmit Key Common Static Keys Pre Authentication Authentication Type 802 1x Broadcast Key Refresh Rate Session Key Refresh Rate 802 1x Session Timeout Value Enterprise 802 11g Access Point VAP_TEST_11G 0 11 AUTO DISABLED 00 12 c 05 95 08 b amp g mixed mode FULL 5 dBm 54Mbps 5 5Mbps 2346 bytes 2347 bytes 100 TUs 60 Mins 30 Mins 1 beacon SHORT OR LONG 64 stations Software Disabled Disabled WEP TKIP and AES DISABLED PRE SHARED KEY PASSPHRASE EMPTY 720 minutes ENABLED al Key 1 EMPTY Key 3 EMPTY DISABLED SHARED DISABLED 30 min 30 min 0 min EMPTY EMPTY Key 2 Key 4 6 79 6 System Configuration Antenna Control method Diversity Antenna ID 0x0000 Default Antenna Antenna Location Indoor Quality of Service WMM Mode SUPPORTED WMM Acknowledge Policy ACO Best Effort Acknowledge AC1 Background Acknowledge AC2 Video Acknowledge AC3 Voice
235. nnel on neighboring access points at least five channels apart to avoid interference with each other For example in the United States you can deploy up to three access points in the same area e g channels 1 6 11 Also note that the channel for wireless clients is automatically set to the same as that used by the access point to which it is linked Range 1 11 Default 1 6 69 6 System Configuration Auto Channel Select Enables the access point to automatically select an unoccupied radio channel Default Enabled Maximum Station Data Rate The maximum data rate at which the access point transmits unicast packets on the wireless interface The maximum transmission distance is affected by the data rate The lower the data rate the longer the transmission distance Default 54 Mbps Super G The Atheros proprietary Super G performance enhancements are supported by the access point These enhancements include bursting compression fast frames and dynamic turbo Maximum throughput ranges between 40 to 60 Mbps for connections to Atheros compatible clients Default Disabled Preamble Sets the length of the signal preamble that is used at the start of a data transmission Default Long e Long Sets the preamble to long 192 microseconds Using a long preamble ensures the access point can support all 802 11b and 802 11g clients e Short or Long Sets the preamble according to the capability of clients that are curr
236. nt 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or 2 Set the data rate to 9600 baud Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none Set the emulation mode to VT100 e When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys 4 Once you have set up the terminal correctly press the Enter key to initiate the console connection The console login screen will be displayed 5 1 5 Initial Configuration For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 7 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 7 6 Initial Configuration Steps Logging In Enter admin for the user name The default password is null so just press Enter at the password prompt The CLI prompt appears displaying the access point s name Username admin Password SMC Enterprise AP Bridge Setting the IP Address By default the access point is configured to obtain IP address settings from a DHCP server If a DHCP server is not available the IP address defaults to 192 168 2 2 which may not be compatible with your network You will therefore have to use the command line interface CLI to assign an IP address that is compatible with your network Type configure to enter configuration mode then ty
237. nt 1 The power injector module automatically adjusts to any AC voltage between 100 240 volts at 50 or 60 Hz No voltage range settings are required Warning The power injector module is designed for indoor use only Never mount the power injector outside with the wireless bridge unit Grounding Point Even though the wireless bridge includes its own built in lightning protection it is important that the unit is properly connected to ground A grounding screw is provided for attaching a ground wire to the unit Water Tight Test Point Caution Do no remove or loosen this screw Doing so could lead to damage of the unit Wall and Pole Mounting Bracket Kit The wireless bridge includes a bracket kit that can be used to mount the bridge to a wall pole radio mast or part of a tower structure 1 7 1 Introduction System Configuration At each location where a unit is installed it must be connected to the local network using the power injector module The following figure illustrates the system component connections External Antenna RF Coaxial Cable Outdoor LAN Switch Wireless Bridge Unit Ethernet Cable Ethernet Cable Lightning Arrestor Power Injector AC Power Features and Benefits Ground Wire e SMC2891W AG units support a 5 GHz point to point wireless link up 15 4 km at 6 Mbps data rate using integrated high gain 17 dBi antennas e SMC2890W AG
238. nt is using static WEP keys for encryption 6 91 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for Displaying Station Status To view status of clients currently associated with the access point use the show station command from the Exec mode SMC AP show station 7 115 Station Table Information if wireless A VAP 0 802 11la Channel Auto No 802 11a Channel Stations if wireless A VAP 1 802 11la Channel Auto No 802 11a Channel Stations No 802 11a Channel Stations if wireless A VAP 3 802 11a Channel Auto No 802 11a Channel Stations if wireless G VAP 0 802 11g Channel Auto No 802 11g Channel Stations if wireless G VAP 1 802 11g Channel Auto No 802 11g Channel Stations No 802 11g Channel Stations if wireless G VAP 3 802 11g Channel Auto No 802 11g Channel Stations SMC AP 6 92 Event Logs The Event Logs window shows the log messages generated by the access point and stored in memory Event Logs BA Jar 01 PPM Janos NSW Jan 01 Sa Jan 01 ESI san 01 NGM san 01 WH Jar 01 F Jan 01 EI Jan 01 Jan 01 2 Jan 01 2 The Event Logs table displays the following information Log Time The time the log message was generated 15 43 59 Information 15 43 59 Information 15 43 49 Information 15 42 59 Information 5 42 59 Information 15 42 46 Information 15 41 59 Information 35 41 59 Information 95 41 42 Information 05 40 59 Informatio
239. nterruption of operation of this device The radar detection feature will automatically restart operation on a channel free of radar The 5 GHz Turbo Mode feature is not allowed for operation in any European Community country The current setting for this feature is found in the 5 GHz 802 11a Radio Settings Window as described in the user guide The 5 GHz radio s Auto Channel Select setting described in the user guide must always remain enabled to ensure that automatic 5 GHz channel selection complies with European requirements The current setting for this feature is found in the 5 GHz 802 11a Radio Settings Window as described in the user guide This device may be operated indoors or outdoors in all countries of the European Community using the 2 4 GHz band Channels 1 13 except where noted below In Italy the end user must apply for a license from the national spectrum authority to operate this device outdoors In Belgium outdoor operation is only permitted using the 2 46 2 4835 GHz band Channel 13 In France outdoor operation is only permitted using the 2 4 2 454 GHz band Channels 1 7 Operation Using 5 GHz Channels in the European Community The user installer must use the provided configuration utility to check the current channel of operation and make necessary configuration changes to ensure operation occurs in conformance with European National spectrum usage laws as described below and elsewhere in this documen
240. o a common VAP interface When the encryption cipher suite is set to TKIP the unicast encryption cipher TKIP or AES CCMP is negotiated for each client The access point advertises it s supported encryption ciphers in beacon frames and probe responses WPA and WPA2 clients select the cipher they support and return the choice in the association request to the access point For mixed mode operation the cipher used for broadcast frames is always TKIP WEP encryption is not allowed The required option places the VAP into TKIP only mode The supported option places the VAP into TKIP AES WEP mode The required mode is used in WPA only environments The supported mode can be used for mixed environments with legacy WPA products specifically WEP For example WPA WEP The WPA2 WEP environment is not available because WPA2 does not support WEP To place the VAP into AES only mode use required and then select the cipher ccmp option for the cipher suite command Wireless Security Commands 7 Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 auth shared key SMC AP if wireless g Related Commands encryption 7 123 key 7 124 encryption This command enables data encryption for wireless communications Use the no form to disable data encryption Syntax encryption no encryption Default Setting disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage e Wired Equivalent Privacy
241. o authenticate each client attached to a wireless network Shared Key authentication must be used along with the 802 11 Wireless Equivalent Privacy algorithm Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Glossary 4 G lossary Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP A data encryption method designed as a replacement for WEP TKIP avoids the problems of WEP static keys by dynamically changing data encryption keys Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads Virtual Access Point VAP Virtual AP technology multiplies the number of Access Points present within the RF footprint of a single physical access device With Virtual AP technology WLAN users within the device s footprint can associate with what appears to be different access points and their associated network services All the services are delivered using a single radio channel enabling Virtual AP technology to optimize the use of limited WLAN radio spectrum Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain rega
242. oadcast key refresh rate 5 7 67 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 802 1X session key refresh rate 5 7 68 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 802 1X session timeout 300 7 68 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 auth open system 7 124 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 encryption 7 123 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA employs a combination of several technologies to provide an enhanced security solution for 802 11 wireless networks The access point supports the following WPA components and features IEEE 802 1X and the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP WPA employs 802 1X as its basic framework for user authentication and dynamic key management The 802 1X client and RADIUS server should use an appropriate EAP type such as EAP TLS Transport Layer Security EAP TTLS Tunneled TLS or PEAP Protected EAP for strongest authentication Working together these protocols provide mutual authentication between a client the access point anda RADIUS server that prevents users from accidentally joining a rogue network Only when a RADIUS server has authenticated a user s credentials will encryption keys be sent to the access point and client Note To implement WPA on wireless clients requires a WPA enabled network card driver and 802 1X client software that supports the EAP authentication type that you want to use Windows XP provides native WPA support other systems require additional software Temporal Key
243. ogging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Class Mode Exec Privileged Configuration Global Interface ethernet Interface wireless Interface wireless vap 7 4 Entering Commands 7 Exec Commands When you open a new console session on an access point the system enters Exec command mode Only a limited number ofthe commands are available in this mode You can access all other commands only from the configuration mode To access Exec mode open
244. ommand selects the use of two diversity antennas or a single antenna for the radio interface Syntax antenna control lt diversity left right gt e diversity The radio uses two identical antennas in a diversity mode left The radio uses a single antenna on the left side Select this method when using an optional external antenna that is connected to the left antenna connector Also select this method when using the integrated 5 GHz antenna e right The radio uses a single antenna on the right side Select this method when using an optional external antenna that is connected to the right antenna connector Default Setting Diversity Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage The antenna ID must be selected in conjunction with the antenna control method to configure proper use of any of the antenna options Example SMC AP if wireless g antenna control right SMC AP if wireless g antenna id This command specifies the antenna type connected to the access point represented by a four digit hexadecimal ID number either the integrated antenna ID 0000 or an optional external antenna Syntax antenna id lt antenna id gt antenna id Specifies the ID number of an approved antenna that is connected to the access point Range 0x0000 OxFFFF Default Setting 0x0000 Integrated antenna 7 103 7 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage
245. ommands Use the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the commands in the history buffer Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer SMC AP show history config exit show history SMC AP 7 10 System Management Commands 7 show line This command displays the console port s configuration settings Command Mode Exec Example The console port settings are fixed at the values shown below SMC AP show line Console Line Information databits 8 parity none speed 9600 stop bits 1 SMC AP System Management Commands These commands are used to configure the user name password system logs browser management options clock settings and a variety of other system information Table 7 4 System Management Commands Command Function Mode Page Country Setting country Sets the access point country code Exec 7 12 Device Designation prompt Customizes the command line prompt GC 7 14 system name Specifies the host name for the access point GC 7 14 snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 7 42 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 7 43 Management Access username Configures the user name for management access GC 7 15 password Specifies the password for management access GC 7 15 ip ssh server enable Enables the Secure Shell serve
246. on 7 118 rogue ap scan This command starts an immediate scan for access points on the radio interface Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage While the access point scans a channel for rogue APs wireless clients will not be able to connect to the access point Therefore avoid frequent scanning or scans of a long duration unless there is a reason to believe that more intensive scanning is required to find a rogue AP Example SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap scan SMC AP if wireless g rogueApDetect Completed Radio G 9 APs detected rogueAPDetect Radio G refreshing ap database now SMC AP if wireless g 7 119 7 Command Line Interface show rogue ap This command displays the current rogue AP database Command Mode Exec Example 802 1la Channel AP Address BSSID 802 11g Channel AP Address BSSID 00 04 e2 2a 37 23 00 04 e2 2a 37 3d 00 04 e2 2a 37 49 00 90 d1 08 9d a7 00 30 1 fb 31 f4 SMC AP SMC AP show rogue ap Rogue AP Status SSID Rogue AP Status Channel MHz RSSI Type Privacy RSN SSID Channel MHz RSSI Type Privacy RSN WLAN1AP 11 2462 MHz 17 ESS ANY 7 2442 MHz 42 ESS WLAN1AP 9 2452 MHz 42 ESS WLAN1AP 1 2412 MHz 12 ESS WLAN 6 2437 MHz 16 ESS Wireless Security Commands The commands described in this section configure parameters for wireless security on the 802 11a and 802 119 interfaces Table 7
247. onfigured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax ip http server no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config ip http server SMC AP config Related Commands ip http port 7 17 ip http session timeout This command sets the time limit for an idle web interface session Syntax ip http session timeout lt time gt time Sets the web interface session timeout Range 0 1800 seconds 0 means disabled Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config ip http session timeout 0 SMC AP config Related Commands ip http port 7 17 7 18 System Management Commands 7 ip https port Use this command to specify the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the access point s Web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip https port lt port_number gt no ip https port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS SSL Range 80 1024 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port To avoid using common reserved TCP port numbers below 1024 the configurable range is restricted to 443 and between 1024 and 65535 e If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port n
248. ons including a web based interface a direct connection to the console port Telnet Secure Shell SSH or using SNMP software The initial configuration steps can be made through the web browser interface or CLI The access point requests an IP address via DHCP by default If no response is received from the DHCP server then the access point uses the default address 192 168 2 2 If this address is not compatible with your network you can first use the command line interface CLI as described below to configure a valid address Note Units sold in countries outside the United States are not configured with a specific country code You must use the CLI to set the country code and enable wireless operation page 5 3 Initial Setup through the CLI Required Connections The access point provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuration Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the access point You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown on page B 3 To connect to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the access poi
249. operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the FTP TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy lt ftp tftp gt file copy config lt ftp tftp gt ftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from an FTP server e tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a flash memory file config Keyword that allows you to upload the configuration file from flash memory Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command e Only a configuration file can be uploaded to an FTP TFTP server but every type of file can be downloaded to the access point The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the FTP TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access point Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ e Due to the size limit of the flash memory the access point supports only two operation code files The system configuration file must be named syscfg in all copy commands Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server SMC AP copy config tftp TFTP Source file name syscfg TETP Server IP 192 168 2 29 SMC AP
250. or WEP only encryption is used if encryption is enabled e shared key Authentication is based on a shared key that has been distributed to all stations wpa Clients using WPA are accepted for authentication wpa psk Clients using WPA with a Pre shared Key are accepted for authentication e wpa2 Clients using WPA2 are accepted for authentication wpa2 psk Clients using WPA2 with a Pre shared Key are accepted for authentication wpa wpa2 mixed Clients using WPA or WPA2 are accepted for authentication wpa wpa2 psk mixed Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre shared Key are accepted for authentication required Clients are required to use WPA or WPA2 supported Clients may use WPA or WPA2 if supported Default Setting open system Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage The auth command automatically configures settings for each authentication type including encryption 802 1X and cipher suite The command auth open system disables encryption and 802 1X 7 121 7 Command Line Interface 7 122 To use WEP shared key authentication set the authentication type to shared key and define at least one static WEP key with the key command Encryption is automatically enabled by the command To use WEP encryption only no authentication set the authentication type to open system Then enable WEP with the encryption command and define at least one static WEP key
251. or more time servers GC 1 35 sntp server enable Accepts time from the specified time servers GC 1 35 sntp server date time Manually sets the system date and time GC 7 36 sntp server Sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time GC 7 37 daylight saving sntp server timezone Sets the time zone for the access point s internal clock GC 7 37 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings Exec 7 38 System Clock Commands 7 sntp server ip This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server ip lt 1 2 gt lt ip gt e 1 First time server 2 Second time server ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Default Setting 137 92 140 80 192 43 244 18 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When SNTP client mode is enabled using the sntp server enable command the sntp server ip command specifies the time servers from which the access point polls for time updates The access point will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received Example SMC AP config sntp server ip 10 1 0 19 SMC AP Related Commands sntp server enable 7 35 show snip 7 38 sntp server enable This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization with NTP or SNTP time servers specified by the sntp server ip command Use
252. ore and configure the Authentication Type Setup and Encryption fields amp Security E Encryption Disable Enable E Pre Authentication Disable O Enable E Authentication Setup Open system sha fiers ine ann Owe o anzue HADI weap Owen A Multicast Comer Pre Shared Key Settings Authentication Type Setup Sets the access point to communicate as an open system that accepts network access attempts from any client or with clients using pre configured static shared keys Default Open System e Open System If you don t set up any other security mechanism on the access point the network has no protection and is open to all users This is the default setting Shared Key Sets the access point to use WEP shared keys If this option is selected you must configure at least one key on the access point and all clients Note To use 802 1X on wireless clients requires a network card driver and 802 1X client software that supports the EAP authentication type that you want to use Windows 2000 SP3 or later and Windows XP provide 802 1X client support Windows XP also provides native WPA support Other systems require additional client software to support 802 1X and WPA Encryption Enable or disable the access point to use data encryption WEP TKIP or AES If this option is selected when using static WEP keys you must configure at least one key on the access point and all clients Default Disabled Note You must enable
253. oth 802 11a and 802 11g interfaces are supporting a high number of clients simultaneously 7 127 7 Command Line Interface Example SMC AP if wireless a mic_mode hardware SMC AP if wireless g wpa pre shared key This command defines a Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Pre shared key Syntax wpa pre shared key lt hex passphrase key gt lt value gt hex Specifies hexadecimal digits as the key input format passphrase key Specifies an ASCII pass phrase string as the key input format value The key string For ASCII input specify a string between 8 and 63 characters For HEX input specify exactly 64 digits Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage To support WPA or WPA2 for client authentication use the auth command to specify the authentication type and use the wpa preshared key command to specify one static key e If WPA or WPA2 is used with pre shared key mode all wireless clients must be configured with the same pre shared key to communicate with the access point s VAP interface Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 wpa pre shared key ASCII agoodsecret SMC AP if wireless g Related Commands auth 7 121 pmksa lifetime This command sets the time for aging out cached WPA2 Pairwise Master Key Security Association PMKSA information for fast roaming Syntax pmksa lifetime lt minutes gt minutes The time for aging out PMKSA informatio
254. otifications to send The following items are available sysSystemUp The access point is up and running e sysSystemDown The access point is about to shutdown and reboot sysRadiusServerChanged The access point has changed from the primary RADIUS server to the secondary or from the secondary to the primary sysConfigFileVersionChanged The access point s configuration file has been changed e dot11StationAssociation A client station has successfully associated with the access point e dot11StationReAssociation A client station has successfully re associated with the access point e dot11StationAuthentication A client station has been successfully authenticated e dot11StationRequestFail A client station has failed association re association or authentication e dot111nterfaceBFail The 802 11b interface has failed e dott 1InterfaceAFail The 802 11a or 802 11g interface has failed e dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess A client station has successfully authenticated its MAC address with the RADIUS server dot1xMacAddrAuthFail A client station has failed MAC address authentication with the RADIUS server dot1xAuthNotlnitiated A client station did not initiate 802 1X authentication e dotixAuthSuccess A 802 1X client station has been successfully authenticated by the RADIUS server dot1xAuthFail A 802 1X client station has failed RADIUS authentication e dotixSuppAuthenticated A supplicant
255. pe interface ethernet to access the Ethernet interface configuration mode SMC AP configure SMC AP config interface ethernet SMC AP config if First type no ip dhcp to disable DHCP client mode Then type ip address ip address netmask gateway where ip address is the access point s IP address netmask is the network mask for the network and gateway is the default gateway router Check with your system administrator to obtain an IP address that is compatible with your network SMC AP if ethernet no ip dhcp SMC AP if ethernet ip address 192 168 2 2 259 255 259 0 192 168 2 254 SMC AP if ethernet After configuring the access point s IP parameters you can access the management interface from anywhere within the attached network The command line interface can also be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network 5 2 Logging In 5 Setting the Country Code Units sold in the United States are configured by default to use only radio channels 1 11 in 802 11b or 802 119 mode as defined by FCC regulations Units sold in other countries are configured by default without a country code i e 99 You must use the CLI to set the country code Setting the country code restricts operation of the access point to the radio channels and transmit power levels permitted for wireless networks in the specified country Type exit to leave configuration
256. pported command from the VAP interface mode to enable 802 1X authentication Set the session and broadcast key refresh rate and the re authentication timeout To display the current settings use the show interface wireless command from the Exec mode not shown in the example SMC AP if wireless g VAP SMC AP if wireless g VAP SMC AP if wireless g VAP session key refresh ra SMC AP if wireless g VAP SMC AP at ae oPPooo 1X supported 1X broadcast key refresh rate 5 1X 1X session timeout 300 Status Information The Status page includes information on the following items Menu Description Page AP Status Displays configuration settings for the basic system and the 6 88 wireless interface Station Status Shows the wireless clients currently associated with the access 6 91 point Event Logs Shows log messages stored in memory 6 93 Access Point Status The AP Status window displays basic system configuration settings as well as the settings for the wireless interface 6 88 Status Information 6 MAP Status AP System Configuration O days 5 hours 23 minutes 47 seconds 00 12 CF 2C 21 C8 00 12 CF 20 21 37 00 12 CF 20 21 38 SMC Enterprise AP Bndge Contact 192 168 2 2 0 0 00 ENABLED 80 4 3 3 9 2 18 ROL Interface Wireless A SMC_VAP_11A0 SMC_VAP_11A1 SMC_VAP_11A2 SMC_VAP_1103 0 DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED OPEN AP
257. quired or to allow access to both WPA and WEP clients Supported Default Required Cipher Suite Selects an encryption method for the global key used for multicast and broadcast traffic which is supported by all wireless clients e WEP WEP is used as the multicast encryption cipher You should select WEP only when both WPA and WEP clients are supported e TKIP TKIP is used as the multicast encryption cipher e AES CCMP AES CCMP is used as the multicast encryption cipher AES CCMP is the standard encryption cipher required for WPA2 WPA Pre Shared Key Type If the WPA or WPA2 pre shared key mode is used all wireless clients must be configured with the same key to communicate with the access point Hexadecimal Enter a key as a string of 64 hexadecimal numbers e Alphanumeric Enter a key as an easy to remember form of letters and numbers The string must be from 8 to 63 characters which can include spaces 6 84 Radio Interface 6 The configuration settings for WPA are summarized below Table 6 4 WPA Configuration Settings WPA and WPA2 pre shared key only WPA and WPA2 over 802 1X Encryption Enabled Encryption Enabled Authentication Setup WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or Authentication Setup WPA WPA2 WPA WPA2 mixed WPA WPA2 mixed Cipher Suite WEP TKIP AES CCMP Cipher Suite WEP TKIP AES CCMP WPA Pre shared Key Type Hex ASCII requires RADIUS server to be specified 1 You must enable data
258. r IC E 7 16 ip ssh server port Sets the Secure Shell port IC E 7 16 ip telnet server enable Enables the Telnet server IC E 7 17 AP mgmtiP Specifies an IP address or range of addresses allowed GC 7 21 access to the management interface APmgmtul Enables or disables SNMP Telnet or web management GC 7 22 access show APmanagement Shows the AP management configuration Exec 7 22 7 11 7 Command Line Interface Table 7 4 System Management Commands Command Function Mode Page Web Server ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC 7 17 ip http server Allows the access point to be monitored or configured froma GC 7 18 browser ip http session timeout Sets the timeout for the web browser interface GC 7 18 ip https port Specifies the UDP port number used for a secure HTTP GC 7 19 connection to the access point s Web interface ip https server Enables the secure HTTP server on the access point GC 7 19 web redirect Enables web authentication of clients using a public access GC 7 20 Intemet service System Status show system Displays system information Exec 7 24 show version Displays version information for the system Exec 7 25 show config Displays detailed configuration information for the system Exec 7 25 show hardware Displays the access point s hardware version Exec 7 29 country This command configures the access point s country code whi
259. r interface to access IP addressing only if the access point already has an IP address that is reachable through your network By default the access point will be automatically configured with IP settings from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server However if you are not using a DHCP server to configure IP addressing use the CLI to manually configure the initial IP values See page 5 2 After you have network access to the access point you can use the web browser interface to modify the initial IP configuration if needed Note If there is no DHCP server on your network or DHCP fails the access point will automatically start up with a default IP address of 192 168 2 2 TCP IP Settings DHCP Client Enable The Access Point will obtain the IP Address from the DHCP Server A Disable The Access Point will use the following IP setup DHCP Client Enable Select this option to obtain the IP settings for the access point from a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server The IP address subnet mask default gateway and Domain Name Server DNS address are dynamically assigned to the access point by the network DHCP server Default Enabled DHCP Client Disable Select this option to manually configure a static address for the access point IP Address The IP address of the access point Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods e Subnet Mask Th
260. r tower construction Therefore it is recommended to consult a professional contractor knowledgeable in local radio regulations prior to equipment installation Data Rates Using its 5 GHz integrated antenna the SMC2891W AG bridge can operate over a range of up to 15 4 km 9 6 miles or provide a high speed connection of 54 Mbps 108 Mbps in turbo mode However the maximum data rate for a link decreases as the operating range increases When you are planning each wireless bridge link take into account the maximum distance and data rates for the various antenna options See Transmit Power on page C 5 Radio Path Planning Although the wireless bridge uses IEEE 802 11a radio technology which is capable of reducing the effect of multipath signals due to obstructions the wireless bridge link requires a radio line of sight between the two antennas for optimum performance The concept of radio line of sight involves the area along a radio link path through which the bulk of the radio signal power travels This area is known as the first Fresnel Zone of the radio link For a radio link not to be affected by obstacles along its path no object including the ground must intrude within 60 of the first Fresnel Zone The following figure illustrates the concept of a good radio line of sight 3 1 3 Bridge Link Planning Visual Line of Sight Radio Line of Sight If there are obstacles in the radio path there may still
261. rdless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN Wi Fi Protected Access WPA employs 802 1X as its basic framework for user authentication and dynamic key management to provide an enhanced security solution for 802 11 wireless networks Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WEP is based on the use of security keys and the popular RC4 encryption algorithm Wireless devices without a valid WEP key will be excluded from network traffic WPA Pre shared Key PSK PSK can be used for small office networks that may not have the resources to configure and maintain a RADIUS server WPA provides a simple operating mode that uses just a pre shared password for network access Glossary 5 Index Numerics 802 11g 7 97 A AES 6 82 authentication 6 12 cipher suite 6 84 7 122 closed system 7 110 configuring 6 12 MAC address 6 13 7 71 7 72 type 6 70 7 110 web redirect 6 13 7 20 B Basic Service Set See BSS beacon interval 6 60 7 105 rate 6 60 7 105 BOOTP 7 91 7 92 BPDU 6 24 BSS 2 2 C cable assignments B 1 crossover B 3 straight through B 2 channel 7 100 channels maximum C 1 Clear To Send See CTS CLI 7 1 command modes 7 4 clients maximum C 1 closed system 6 54 7 110 command line interface See CLI community name configuring 7 42 community string 6
262. re be maintained on a RADIUS server allowing any rogue APs to be identified see rogue ap authenticate on page 77 117 The rogue AP database can be viewed using the show rogue ap command The access point sends Syslog messages for each detected access point during a rogue AP scan Example SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap enable configure either syslog or trap or both to receive the rogue APs detected SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap authenticate This command forces the unit to authenticate all access points on the network Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no rogue ap authenticate Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage Enabling authentication in conjunction with a database of approved access points stored on a RADIUS server allows the access point to discover rogue APs With authentication enabled and a configure RADIUS server the access point checks the MAC address Basic Service Set Identifier BSSID of each access point that it finds against a RADIUS server to determine whether the access point is allowed With authentication disabled the access point can identify its neighboring access points only it cannot identify whether the access points are allowed or are rogues If you enable authentication you should also configure a RADIUS server for this access point see RADIUS on page 66 7 Example SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap a
263. reless g 0 3 command not shown in example SMC AP config interface wireless g 7 90 Enter Wireless configuration commands one per line SMC AP if wireless g vap 0 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 auth wpa required Data Encryption is set to Enabled WPA2 Clients mode is set to Disabled WPA Clients Mode is set to Required WPA Multicast Cipher is set to TKIP WPA Unicast Cipher can accept TKIP only WPA Authentication is set to 802 1X Required SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 802 1X broadcast key refresh rate 5 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 802 1x session key refresh rate 5 7 67 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 802 1X session timeout 300 7 68 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 Configuring 802 1X IEEE 802 1X is a standard framework for network access control that uses a central RADIUS server for user authentication This control feature prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring an 802 1 X client application to submit user credentials for authentication The 802 1X standard uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to pass user credentials either digital certificates user names and passwords or other from the client to the RADIUS server Client authentication is then verified on the RADIUS server before the access point grants client access to the network The 802 1X EAP packets are also used to pass dynamic unicast session keys and static broadcast keys to wireless clients Session keys are unique to
264. rent SNTP settings use the show sntp command SMC AP config sntp server ip 1 10 1 0 19 7 35 SMC AP config sntp server enable 7 35 SMC AP config sntp server timezone 8 7 37 SMC AP config sntp server daylight saving 7 37 Enter Daylight saving from which month lt 1 12 gt 3 and which day lt 1 31 gt 31 Enter Daylight saving end to which month lt 1 12 gt 10 and which day lt 1 31 gt 31 SMC AP config exit SMC AP show sntp 7 38 SNTP Information Service State Enabled SNTP server 1 IP 10 12 20 19 SNTP server 2 IP 192 43 244 18 Current Time 19 35 Oct 10th 2003 Time Zone 8 TAIPEI BEIJING Daylight Saving Enabled from Mar 31st to Oct 31st SMC AP 6 36 Advanced Configuration 6 CLI Commands for the System Clock The following example shows how to manually set the system time when SNTP server support is disabled on the access point SMC AP config no sntp server enable SMC AP config sntp server date time Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter Year lt 1970 2100 gt 2003 Month lt 1 12 gt 10 Day lt 1 31 gt 10 Hour lt 0 23 gt 18 Min lt 0 59 gt 35 SMC AP config RSSI The RSSI value displayed on the RSSI page represents a signal to noise ratio A value of 30 would indicate that the power of the received signal is 30 dBm above the ambient noise floor This value can be used to align antennas see page 4 6 and monitor the quality of the received si
265. reshed for stations using 802 1X dynamic keying Syntax 802 1x broadcast key refresh rate lt rate gt rate The interval at which the access point rotates broadcast keys Range 0 1440 minutes Default Setting 0 Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The access point uses SMC APOL Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LANs packets to pass dynamic unicast session and broadcast keys to wireless clients The 802 1x broadcast key refresh rate command specifies the interval after which the broadcast keys are changed The 802 1x session key refresh rate command specifies the interval after which unicast session keys are changed 7 67 7 Command Line Interface Dynamic broadcast key rotation allows the access point to generate a random group key and periodically update all key management capable wireless clients Example SMC AP config 802 1X broadcast key refresh rate 5 SMC AP config 802 1x session key refresh rate This command sets the interval at which unicast session keys are refreshed for associated stations using dynamic keying Syntax 802 1x session key refresh rate lt rate gt rate The interval at which the access point refreshes a session key Range 0 1440 minutes Default Setting 0 Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Session keys are unique to each client and are used to authenticate a client connection and correlate traffic pa
266. rface Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 7 10 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page bootfile Specifies the file or image used to startup the system GC 7 56 copy Copies a code image or configuration between flash Exec 1 57 memory and a FTP TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image Exec 7 58 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory Exec 7 59 show bootfile Displays the name of the current operation code file that Exec 7 59 booted the system bootfile This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax bootfile lt filename gt filename Name of the image file Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Command Usage The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names is 32 characters Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ lf the file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example SMC AP bootfile img bin SMC AP 7 56 Flash File Commands 7 copy This command copies a boot file code image or configuration file between the access point s flash memory and a FTP TFTP server When you save the configuration settings to a file on a FTP TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the access point to restore system
267. rface From the wireless interface mode use the rogue ap enable command to enable rogue AP detection Set the duration and interval times with the rogue ap duration and rogue ap interval commands If required start an immediate scan 6 56 Radio Interface 6 using the rogue ap scan command To view the database of detected access points use the show rogue ap command from the Exec level SMC AP config interface wireless g Enter Wireless configuration commands one per line SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap enable configure either syslog or trap or both to receive the rogue APs detected SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap duration 200 SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap interval 120 SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap scan SMC AP if wireless g rogueApDetect Completed Radio G rogueAPDetect Radio G refreshing ap database now SMC AP if wireless g exit SMC AP show rogue ap 802 1la Channel Rogue AP Status AP Address BSSID SSID Channel MHz RSSI 802 11g Channel Rogue AP Status AP Address BSSID SSID Channel MHz RSSI 00 04 e2 2a 37 23 WLAN1AP 11 2462 MHz 17 00 04 e2 2a 37 3d ANY 7 2442 MHz 42 00 04 e2 2a 37 49 WLAN1AP 9 2452 MHz 42 00 90 d1 08 9d a7 WLAN1AP 1 2412 MHz 12 00 30 f1 fb 31 4 WLAN 6 2437 MHz 16 SMC AP 7 90 7 116 7 118 7 118 7 119 5 APs detected 7 120 6 57 6 System Configuration Configuring Common Radio Settings To configure common radio settings select the Radio S
268. ridge link path cost 1 50 SMC AP if wireless a bridge link port priority Use this command to configure the priority for the specified port Syntax bridge link port priority lt index gt lt priority gt index Specifies the bridge link number on the wireless bridge Range 1 6 required on wireless interface only priority The priority for a port Range 1 255 7 88 Spanning Tree Commands 7 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a wireless bridge are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example SMC AP if wireless a bridge link port priority 1 64 SMC AP if wireless a Related Commands bridge link path cost 7 88 show bridge stp This command displays aging time and spanning tree settings for the Ethernet and wireless interfaces Syntax show bridge stp Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show bridge stp Bridge MAC 00 12 CF 05 B7 84 Status Disabled priority 0 designated root priority 0 MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 root path cost 5 0 root Port no 0 Hold Time z 1 Seconds Hello Time 2 Seconds Maximum Age 20 Second
269. rver to be used for name to address resolution Syntax dns primary server lt server address gt dns secondary server lt server address gt primary server Primary server used for name resolution secondary server Secondary server used for name resolution server address IP address of domain name server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The primary and secondary name servers are queried in sequence Example This example specifies two domain name servers SMC AP if ethernet dns primary server 192 168 1 55 SMC AP if ethernet dns secondary server 10 1 0 55 SMC AP if ethernet Related Commands show interface ethernet 7 94 ip address This command sets the IP address for the access point Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address lt ip address gt lt netmask gt lt gateway gt no ip address ip address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets e gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting IP address 192 168 2 2 Netmask 255 255 255 0 7 91 7 Command Line Interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage DHCP is enabled by default To manually configure a new IP address you must first disable the DHCP client with the no ip dhcp command You must assign a
270. ry server has been configured the agent will then attempt to send DHCP requests to the secondary server Example SMC AP config dhcp relay enable SMC AP config 7 39 7 Command Line Interface dhcp relay This command configures the primary and secondary DHCP server addresses Syntax dhcp relay lt primary secondary gt lt ip_address gt primary The primary DHCP server secondary The secondary DHCP server ip_address IP address of the server Default Setting Primary and secondary 0 0 0 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config dhcp relay primary 192 168 2 20 SMC AP config show dhcp relay This command displays the current DHCP relay configuration Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show dhcp relay DHCP Relay ENABLED Primary DHCP Server 192 168 2 20 Secondary DHCP Server 0 0 0 0 SMC AP 7 40 SNMP Commands 7 SNMP Commands Controls access to this access point from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the hosts that will receive trap messages Table 7 9 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp server community Sets up the community access string to permitaccess GC 7 42 to SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 7 42 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 7 43 snmp server e
271. ryption You must enable data encryption in order to enable all types of encryption WEP TKIP or AES in the access point Pre Authentication When using WPA2 over 802 1X pre authentication can be enabled which allows clients to roam to a new access point and be quickly associated without performing full 802 1X authentication Default Disabled Authentication Setup To use WPA or WPA2 set the access point to one of the following options If a WPA WPA2 mode that operates over 802 1X is selected WPA WPA2 or WPA WPA2 mixed the 802 1X settings and RADIUS server details need to be configured Be sure you have also configured a RADIUS server on the network before enabling authentication If a WPA WPA2 Pre shared Key mode is selected WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or WPA WPA2 PSK Mixed be sure to specify the key string e WPA Clients using WPA over 802 1X are accepted for authentication e WPA PSK Clients using WPA with a Pre shared Key are accepted for authentication e WPA2 Clients using WPA2 over 802 1X are accepted for authentication e WPA2 PSK Clients using WPA2 with a Pre shared Key are accepted for authentication e WPA WPA2 mixed Clients using WPA or WPA2 over 802 1X are accepted for authentication e WPA WPA2 PSK mixed Clients using WPA or WPA2 with a Pre shared Key are accepted for authentication WPA Configuration Each VAP interface can be configured to allow only WPA enabled clients to access the network Re
272. s 1 192 168 2 29 UDP Port 514 State Enabled 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 514 State Disabled SMC AP 7 33 7 Command Line Interface show event log This command displays log messages stored in the access point s memory Syntax show event log Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show event log Mar 09 2 57 55 Information 802 11g 11g Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 2 57 55 Information 802 11g Radio channel updated to 8 Mar 09 57 34 Information 802 11g 11g Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 57 18 Information 802 11g 11g Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 56 35 Information 802 1la lla Radio Interface Enabled Mar 09 55 52 Information SSH task Set SSH server port to 22 Mar 09 55 52 Information SSH task Enable SSH server Mar 09 55 52 Information Enable Telnet Mar 09 55 40 Information 802 1la lla Radio Interface Disabled Mar 09 55 40 Information 802 1lla Transmit Power set to QUARTER Press lt n gt next lt p gt previous lt a gt abort lt y gt continue to end SMC AP configure Enter configuration commands one per line End with CTRL Z SMC AP config logging clear System Clock Commands These commands are used to configure SNTP and system clock settings on the access point Table 7 7 System Clock Commands 7 34 Command Function Mode Page sntp server ip Specifies one
273. s Forward Delay 15 Seconds bridge Hello Time 2 Seconds bridge Maximum Age 20 Seconds bridge Forward Delay 15 Seconds time since top change 89185 Seconds topology change count 0 SMC AP 7 89 7 Command Line Interface Ethernet Interface Commands The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the Ethernet port and wireless interface Table 7 16 Ethernet Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface ethernet Enters Ethernet interface configuration mode GC 7 90 dns primary server Specifies the primary name server IC E 7 91 dns secondary server Specifies the secondary name server IC E 7 91 ip address Sets the IP address for the Ethemet interface IC E 7 91 ip dhcp Submits a DHCP request for an IP address IC E 7 92 speed duplex Configures speed and duplex operation on the IC E 7 93 Ethemet interface shutdown Disables the Ethemet interface IC E 7 94 show interface ethernet Shows the status for the Ethernet interface Exec 7 94 interface ethernet This command enters Ethernet interface configuration mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify the 10 100Base TX network interface enter the following command SMC AP config interface ethernet SMC AP if ethernet 7 90 Ethernet Interface Commands 7 dns server This command specifies the address for the primary or secondary domain name se
274. s the command history buffer Exec 7 10 show line Shows the configuration settings for the console port Exec 7 11 7 7 7 Command Line Interface configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify most of the settings on the access point You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling the context modes for Interface Configuration See Using the Command Line Interface on page 1 Default Setting None Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP configure SMC AP config Related Commands end 7 8 end This command returns to the previous configuration mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Configuration mode from the Interface Configuration mode SMC AP if ethernet end SMC AP config exit This command returns to the Exec mode or exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any 7 8 General Commands 7 Example This example shows how to return to the Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session SMC AP if ethernet exit SMC APtexit CLI session with the Access Point is now closed Username ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping lt host_name ip_address gt host_name Alias of the host ip_address
275. sable O Enable Disable O Enable 6 a H S o lt G a s z a 6 53 6 System Configuration Association Timeout Interval 5 60 Mins 30 30 30 30 WPA2 PMKSA Life Time 1 1440 Mins 720 720 720 720 Default VLAN ID The VLAN ID assigned to wireless clients associated to the VAP interface that are not assigned to a specific VLAN by RADIUS server configuration Default 1 Closed System When enabled the VAP interface does not include its SSID in beacon messages Nor does it respond to probe requests from clients that do not include a fixed SSID Default Disable Authentication Timeout Interval The time within which the client should finish authentication before authentication times out Range 5 60 minutes Default 60 minutes Association Timeout Interval The idle time interval when no frames are sent after which a client is disassociated from the VAP interface Range 5 60 minutes Default 30 minutes WPA2 PMKSA Life Time WPA2 provides fast roaming for authenticated clients by retaining keys and other security settings in a cache for each VAP In this way when clients roam back into a VAP they had previously been using re authentication is not required When a WPA2 client is first authenticated it receives a Pairwise Master Key PMK that is used to generate the other keys used for unicast data encryption This key and other client information form a c
276. sage e The web redirect feature is used to support billing for a public access wireless network After successful association to an access point a client is redirected to an access point login web page as soon as Internet access is 7 20 System Management Commands 7 attempted The client is then authenticated by entering a user name and password on the web page This process allows controlled access for clients without requiring 802 1X or MAC authentication e Web redirect requires a RADIUS server on the wired network with configured user names and passwords for authentication The RADIUS server details must also be configured on the access point See show bootfile on page 77 59 Use the show system command to display the current web redirect status Example SMC AP config web redirect SMC AP config APmgmtIP This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the access point through various protocols Caution Secure Web HTTPS connections are not affected by the UI Management or IP Management settings Syntax APmgmtIP lt multiple P_address subnet_mask single IP_address any gt multiple Adds IP addresses within a specifiable range to the SNMP web and Telnet groups e single Adds an IP address to the SNMP web and Telnet groups any Allows any IP address access through SNMP web and Telnet groups IP_address Adds IP addresses to th
277. se the proper tools or ask a professional cable supplier to construct the cable White Orange Stripe 8 Pin DIN White Green Stripe Female ui RJ 45 Blue White Blue Stripe Green W osouPomr White Brown Stripe Brown l AN sono 8 Pin DIN Female Front View B 4 Appendix C Specifications General Specifications Maximum Channels 802 11a US amp Canada 13 normal mode 5 turbo mode Japan 4 normal mode 1 turbo mode ETSI 11 channels normal mode 4 turbo mode Taiwan 8 normal mode 3 turbo mode 802 11b g FCC IC 1 11 ETSI 1 13 France 10 13 MKK 1 14 Taiwan 1 11 Maximum Clients 64 per VAP interface Operating Range See Transmit Power on page C 5 Data Rate See Transmit Power on page C 5 802 11a Normal Mode 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps per channel Turbo Mode 12 18 24 36 48 54 96 108 Mbps per channel 802 119 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps per channel 802 11b 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps per channel Modulation Type 802 11a BPSK QPSK 16 QAM 64 QAM 802 11g CCK BPSK QPSK OFDM 802 11b CCK BPSK QPSK Network Configuration Infrastructure C 1 C Specifications Operating Frequency 802 11a 5 15 5 25 GHz lower band US Canada Japan 5 25 5 35 GHz middle band US Canada 5 725 5 825 GHz upper band US Canada 5 50 5 70 GHz Europe 5 25 5 35 GHz middle
278. server is required in the wired network to centrally manage the credentials of the wireless clients It also provides a mechanism for enhanced network security using dynamic encryption key rotation or W Fi Protected Access WPA Note If you configure RADIUS MAC authentication together with 802 1X RADIUS MAC address authentication is performed prior to 802 1X authentication If RADIUS MAC authentication succeeds then 802 1X authentication is performed If RADIUS MAC authentication fails 802 1X authentication is not performed The access point can also operate in a 802 1X supplicant mode This enables the access point itself to be authenticated with a RADIUS server using a configured MD5 user name and password This prevents rogue access points from gaining access to the network 6 12 Advanced Configuration 6 Authentication MAC Authentication Disable v 802 1x supplicant Disable Enable Local MAC Authentication System Default O Deny allow MAC Authentication Settings O Deny Allow O Delete MAC Authentication Table eee MAC Authentication You can configure a list of the MAC addresses for wireless clients that are authorized to access the network This provides a basic level of authentication for wireless clients attempting to gain access to the network A database of authorized MAC addresses can be stored locally on the access point or remotely on a central RADIUS server Default Disable
279. shutdown no shutdown Default Setting Interface enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage This command allows you to disable the Ethernet port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable the Ethernet port for security reasons Example The following example disables the Ethernet port SMC AP if ethernet shutdown SMC AP if ethernet show interface ethernet This command displays the status for the Ethernet interface Syntax show interface ethernet Default Setting Ethernet interface Command Mode Exec 7 94 Example Wireless Interface Commands 7 SMC AP show interface ethernet Ethernet Interface Information IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Speed duplex Admin status Operational status SMC AP 5 10 1 0558 100Base TX Half Duplex Up Up Wireless Interface Commands The commands described in this section configure connection parameters for the wireless interfaces Table 7 17 Wireless Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface wireless Enters wireless interface configuration mode GC 7 97 vap Provides access to the VAP interface configuration IC W 7 97 mode speed Configures the maximum data rate at which the IC W 7 98 access point transmits unicast packets turbo
280. ssing between a specific client and the access point Example SMC AP config 802 1x session key refresh rate 5 SMC AP config 802 1x session timeout This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Use the no form to disable 802 1X re authentication Syntax 802 1x session timeout lt seconds gt no 802 1x session timeout seconds The number of seconds Range 0 65535 Default 0 Disabled Command Mode 7 68 802 1X Authentication 7 Global Configuration Example SMC AP config 802 1x session timeout 300 SMC AP config 802 1x supplicant enable This command enables the access point to operate as an 802 1X supplicant for authentication Use the no form to disable 802 1X authentication of the access point Syntax 802 1x supplicant enable no 802 1x supplicant Default Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A user name and password must be configured first before the 802 1X supplicant feature can be enabled Example SMC AP config 802 1x supplicant enable SMC AP config 802 1x supplicant user This command sets the user name and password used for authentication of the access point when operating as a 802 1X supplicant Use the no form to clear the supplicant user name and password Syntax 802 1x supplicant user lt username gt lt password gt no 802 1x supplicant user usernam
281. st first submit a valid community string for authentication Access to the access point using SNMP v3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling notifications that are sent to specified user targets 6 40 Configuring SNMP and Trap Message Parameters sm 6 The access point SNMP agent must be enabled to function for versions 1 2c and 3 clients Management access using SNMP v1 and v2c also requires community strings to be configured for authentication Trap notifications can be enabled and sent to up to four management stations i SNMP Contact Disable O Enable 0 0 0 0 Disable Enable Disable O Enable Disable O Enable i 80 00 07 5 80 00 00 27 04 00 00 00 11 SNMP Enables or disables SNMP management access and also enables the access point to send SNMP traps notifications Default Disable Location A text string that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Contact A text string that describes the system contact Maximum length 255 characters Community Name Read Only Defines the SNMP community access string that has read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Maximum length 23 characters case sensitive Default public 6 41 6 System Configuration Community
282. t Allowed 5GHz Channels in Each European Community Country Allowed Frequency Bands Allowed Channel Numbers Countries 5 15 5 25 GHz 36 40 44 48 Austria Belgium 5 15 5 35 GHz 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 France Switzerland Liechtenstein 5 15 5 35 amp 5 470 5 725 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 Denmark Finland GHz 100 104 108 112 116 120 Germany Iceland 124 128 132 136 140 Ireland Italy Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Portugal Spain Sweden U K Allowed 5GHz Channels in Each European Community Country Allowed Frequency Bands Allowed Channel Numbers Countries 5 GHz Operation Not Allowed None Greece Outdoor operation is not allowed using 5 15 5 35 GHz bands Channels 36 64 Channels 36 64 are currently not available for use Safety Compliance Power Cord Safety Please read the following safety information carefully before installing the device Warning Installation and removal of the unit must be carried out by qualified personnel only The unit must be connected to an earthed grounded outlet to comply with international safety standards Do not connect the unit to an A C outlet power supply without an earth ground connection The appliance coupler the connector to the unit and not the wall plug must have a configuration for mating with an EN 60320 IEC 320 appliance inlet The socket outlet must
283. t 12 hexadecimal digits in the form xx xx xx XX XX Xx 7 80 WDS Bridge Commands 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage Every bridge except the root bridge in the wireless bridge network must specify the MAC address of the parent bridge that is linked to the root bridge or the root bridge itself Example SMC AP if wireless a bridge link parent 00 08 2d 69 3a 51 SMC AP if wireless a bridge link child This command configures the MAC addresses of child bridge nodes Syntax bridge link child lt index gt lt mac address gt index The link index number of the child node Range 1 6 mac address The wireless MAC address of a child bridge unit 12 hexadecimal digits in the form xx xx Xx XXx XXx xX Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage In root bridge mode up to six child bridge links can be specified using link index numbers 1 to 6 In bridge mode up to five child links can be specified using link index numbers 2 to 6 Index number 1 is reserved for the parent link which must be set using the bridge parent command Example SMC AP if wireless a bridge link child 2 00 08 3e 84 bc 6d SMC AP if wireless a bridge link child 3 00 08 3e 85 13 f2 SMC AP if wireless a bridge link child 4 00 08 3e 84 79 31 SMC AP if wireless a 7 81 7 Command Line Interface
284. t default used Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start Informational Informational messages only Debug Debugging messages Note The access point error log can be viewed using the Event Logs window in the Status section page 6 93 The Event Logs window displays the last 128 messages logged in chronological order from the newest to the oldest Log messages saved in the access point s memory are erased when the device is rebooted Logging Facility Type Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 16 6 34 Advanced Configuration 6 CLI Commands for System Logging To enable logging on the access point use the logging on command from the global configuration mode The logging level command sets the minimum level of message to log Use the logging console command to enable logging to the console Use the logging host command to specify up to four Syslog servers The CLI also allows the logging facility type command to set the facility type number to use on the Syslog server To view the current logging settings use the show loggin
285. t Halter an der am Mast angebrachten Platte l Befestigen Sie die drahtlose Bridge mit den beigef gten Muttern an der Halterung Ber cksichtigen Sie dabei die Ausrichtung der Antennenpolarisierung alle Antennen in einem Link m ssen mit derselben Polarisierung montiert werden Verwenden der Halterung f r Wandmontage Montieren Sie das Ger t anhand folgender Schritte mit der Halterung f r Wandmontage an eine Wand Achtung Die Halterung f r Wandmontage ist nicht daf r vorgesehen dass die integrierte Antenne der drahtlosen Bridge ausgerichtet werden kann Sie ist f r die Ger teverwendung mit einer externen Antenne gedacht 1 Befestigen Sie die Halterung immer so an eine Wand dass die flache Seite glatt an der Wand anliegt siehe folgende Abbildung D 3 D Montieren der Bridge 2 Halten Sie die Halterung an der gew nschten Stelle an und markieren Sie die Positionen der drei L cher f r die Montageschrauben 3 Bohren Sie drei L cher in die Wand passend zu den Schrauben und den D beln die der Halterung beigelegt sind und befestigen Sie die Halterung an der Wand 4 Befestigen Sie die drahtlose Bridge mit den beigef gten Muttern an der Halterung D 4 Anschlie en der externen Antennen D 5 Verbinden Sie das Ethernet Kabel und das Netzkabel falls erforderlich mit den Anschl ssen auf der Vorderseite der Bridge Anschlie en der externen Antennen Die in der Bridge eingebaute
286. t VLAN ID default VLAN IDs and other client VLAN IDs Otherwise connectivity to the access point will be lost when you enable the VLAN feature Using IEEE 802 1X and a central RADIUS server up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific wireless clients allowing users to remain within the same VLAN as they move around a campus site This feature can also be used to control access to network resources from clients thereby improving security A VLAN ID 1 4094 can be assigned to a client after successful IEEE 802 1X authentication The client VLAN IDs must be configured on the RADIUS server for each user authorized to access the network If a client does not have a configured VLAN ID on the RADIUS server the access point assigns the client to the configured default VLAN ID for the VAP interface Note When using IEEE 802 1X to dynamically assign VLAN IDs the access point must have 802 1X authentication enabled and a RADIUS server configured Wireless clients must also support 802 1X client software 6 19 6 System Configuration When setting up VLAN IDs for each user on the RADIUS server be sure to use the RADIUS attributes and values as indicated in the following table Number RADIUS Attribute Value 64 Tunnel Type VLAN 13 65 Tunnel Medium Type 802 81 Tunnel Private Group ID VLANID 1to 4094 as hexadecimal or string VLAN IDs on the RADIUS server can be entered as hexadecimal digits or a string see r
287. t are allowed to manage the access point Use the no form to delete an SNMP v3 user Syntax snmp server user lt user name gt user name A user defined string for the SNMP user 32 characters maximum Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Up to 10 SNMPv3 users can be configured on the access point The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests from the pass phrase You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command The access point enables SNMP v3 users to be assigned to three pre defined groups Other groups cannot be defined The available groups are RO A read only group using no authentication and no data encryption Users in this group use no security either authentication or encryption in SNMP messages they send to the agent This is the same as SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c 7 47 7 Command Line Interface RWaAuth A read write group using authentication but no data encryption Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key password for authentication but not a DES key password for encryption RWPriv A read write group using authentication and data encryption Users in this group send SNMP messages that use an MD5 key password for authentication and a DES key password for encryption Both the MD5 and DES key passwords must be defined The command prompts for th
288. t does not respond or is unreachable exceeds the limit set by the link integrity ping fail retry command the link is determined as lost Example SMC AP config link integrity ping detect SMC AP config link integrity ping host This command configures the link host name or IP address Use the no form to remove the host setting Syntax link integrity ping host lt host_name ip_address gt no link integrity ping host e host_name Alias of the host ip_address IP address of the host Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config link integrity ping host 192 168 2 20 SMC AP config 7 131 7 Command Line Interface link integrity ping interval This command configures the time between each Ping sent to the link host Syntax link integrity ping interval lt interval gt interval The time between Pings Range 5 60 seconds Default Setting 30 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config link integrity ping interval 20 SMC AP config link integrity ping fail retry This command configures the number of consecutive failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost Syntax link integrity ping fail retry lt counts gt counts The number of failed Ping counts before the link is determined as lost Range 1 10 Default Setting 6 Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config
289. t size larger if very little or no interference is present because it requires overhead to send multiple frames Example SMC AP if wireless g fragmentation length 512 SMC AP if wireless g 7 106 Wireless Interface Commands 7 rts threshold This command sets the packet size threshold at which a Request to Send RTS signal must be sent to the receiving station prior to the sending station starting communications Syntax rts threshold lt threshold gt threshold Threshold packet size for which to send an RTS Range 0 2347 bytes Default Setting 2347 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage e Ifthe threshold is set to 0 the access point always sends RTS signals If set to 2347 the access point never sends RTS signals If set to any other value and the packet size equals or exceeds the RTS threshold the RTS CTS Request to Send Clear to Send mechanism will be enabled The access point sends RTS frames to a receiving station to negotiate the sending of a data frame After receiving an RTS frame the station sends a CTS frame to notify the sending station that it can start sending data e Access points contending for the wireless medium may not be aware of each other The RTS CTS mechanism can solve this Hidden Node problem Example SMC AP if wireless g rts threshold 256 SMC AP if wireless g 7 107 7 Command Line Interface super a This command ena
290. tatus Boot Rom Version Software Version SSH Server SSH Server Port Telnet Server WEB Redirect DHCP Relay Proxy ARP SMC AP A123456789 Management VLAN ID AP 0 days 4 hours 33 minutes 29 seconds Enterprise Wireless AP US UNITED STATES 00 30 F1 F0 9A 9C 192 168 2 2 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED 80 ENABLED 443 Dual band a g v3 053 v4 3 1 9 ENABLED 22 ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED 7 24 System Management Commands 7 show version This command displays the software version for the system Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show version Version Information Version v4 3 2 2 Date Dec 20 2005 18 38 12 SMC AP show config This command displays detailed configuration information for the system Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show config Authentication Information MAC Authentication Server DISABLED MAC Auth Session Timeout Value 0 min 802 1x supplicant DISABLED 802 1x supplicant user EMPTY 802 1x supplicant password EMPTY Address Filtering ALLOWED System Default ALLOW addresses not found in filter table Filter Table No Filter Entries Bootfile Information Local Bridge DISABLED AP Management ENABLED Ethernet Type Filter DISABLED Enabled Protocol Filters 7 25 7 Command Line Interface Hardware Version Information Description SSID Channel Status
291. te traffic Specify a value in the range 0 65535 microseconds e Admission Control The admission control mode for the access category When enabled clients are blocked from using the access category Default Disabled Key Type See Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP on page 6 75 6 65 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for WMM Enter interface wireless mode and type wmm required for clients that want to associate with the access point The wmm acknowledge policy command is used to enable or disable a policy for each access category The wmmparms command defines detailed WMM parameters Enterprise AP if wireless a wmm required 7 138 Enterprise AP if wireless a wmm acknowledge policy 0 noack 7 138 Enterprise AP if wireless a wmmparams ap 0 46311 7 139 6 66 interface wireless a 0 3 command Radio Interface 6 To view the current 802 11a radio settings for the VAP interface use the show SMC AP show interface wireless a Wireless Interface Information Description SSID Turbo Mode Channel Status MAC Address Transmit Power Max Station Data Rate Multicast Data Rate Fragmentation Threshold RTS Threshold Beacon Interval Authentication Timeout Interval Association Timeout Interval DTIM Interval Maximum Association MIC Mode Super A VLAN ID Closed System Multicast cipher WPA clients WPA Key Mgmt Mode WPA PSK Key Type Encryption Default Transmit Key Common Static
292. tem Default Specifies a default action for all unknown MAC addresses that is those not listed in the local MAC database e Deny Blocks access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local database as Allow Allow Permits access for all MAC addresses except those listed in the local database as Deny e MAC Authentication Settings Enters specified MAC addresses and permissions into the local MAC database e MAC Address Physical address of a client Enter six pairs of hexadecimal digits separated by hyphens for example 00 90 D1 12 AB 89 Permission Select Allow to permit access or Deny to block access If Delete is selected the specified MAC address entry is removed from the database Update Enters the specified MAC address and permission setting into the local database e MAC Authentication Table Displays current entries in the local MAC database 6 14 Advanced Configuration 6 CLI Commands for Local MAC Authentication Use the mac authentication server command from the global configuration mode to enable local MAC authentication Use the mac authentication session timeout command to set the authentication interval and web redirect command to enable web based authentication for service billing Set the default action for MAC addresses not in the local table using the address filter default command then enter MAC addresses in the local table using the address filter entry command To remove
293. the maximum length for file names is 32 characters for files on the access point Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Firmware Upgrade Remote Downloads an operation code image file from a specified remote FTP or TFTP server After filling in the following fields click Start Upgrade to proceed e New firmware file Specifies the name of the code file on the server The new firmware file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the FTP TFTP server is 255 characters or 32 characters for files on the access point Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ IP Address IP address or host name of FTP or TFTP server Username The user ID used for login on an FTP server Password The password used for login on an FTP server Configuration File Backup Restore Uploads the current access point configuration file to a specified remote FTP or TFTP server A configuration file can also be downloaded to the access point to restore a specific configuration Export Import Select Export to upload a file to an FTP TFTP server Select Import to download a file from an FTP TFTP server Config file Specifies the name of the configuration file which must always be syscfg A path on the server can be specified using in the name providing the path already exists for example my
294. the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax sntp server enable no sntp server enable Default Setting Enabled 7 35 7 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the access point only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 14 00 January 1 1970 Example SMC AP config sntp server enable SMC AP config Related Commands sntp server ip 7 35 show sntp 7 38 sntp server date time This command sets the system clock Default Setting 00 14 00 January 1 1970 Command Mode Global Configuration Example This example sets the system clock to 17 37 June 19 2003 SMC AP sntp server date time Enter Year lt 1970 2100 gt 2003 Enter Month lt 1 12 gt 6 Enter Day lt 1 31 gt 19 Enter Hour lt 0 23 gt 17 Enter Min lt 0 59 gt 37 SMC AP Related Commands sntp server enable 7 35 7 36 System Clock Commands 7 sntp server daylight saving This command sets the start and end dates for daylight savings time Use the no form to disable daylight savings time Syntax sntp server daylight saving no sntp server daylight saving Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command sets the system clock back one hour during the specified period
295. the parent node must also be configured using the bridge link parent command If the role is set to anything other than Access Point then you should also configure the MAC addresses of the child nodes using the bridge link child command To view the current bridge link settings use the show bridge link command Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge role bridge 7 79 Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge channel auto sync enable 7 80 Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge link child 2 00 08 3e 84 bc 6d 7 81 Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge link child 3 00 08 3e 85 13 2 Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge link child 4 00 08 3e 84 79 31 Enterprise AP if wireless a bridge link parent 00 08 2d 69 3a 51 7 80 Enterprise AP if wireless a exit Enterprise AP show bridge link wireless a 7 83 AP Role Bridge Channel Auto Sync Enable Parent 00 08 2d 69 3a 51 Child Child 2 00 08 3e 84 bce 6d child 3 00 08 3e 85 13 2 Child 4 00 08 3e 84 79 31 Child 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 Child 6 00 00 00 00 00 00 STAs No WDS Stations Enterprise AP 6 25 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for STP Settings If the role of a radio interface is set to Repeater Bridge or Root Bridge STP can be enabled on the access point to maintain a valid network topology To globally enable STP use the bridge stp enable command from the CLI configuration mode Then configure the other global STP parameters for the bri
296. this case the snow or ice has to be cleared from the antennas to restore operation of the link Ethernet Cabling When a suitable antenna location has been determined you must plan a cable route form the wireless bridge outdoors to the power injector module indoors Consider these points The Ethernet cable length should never be longer than 100 m 328 ft e Determine a building entry point for the cable 3 5 3 Bridge Link Planning e Determine if conduits bracing or other structures are required for safety or protection of the cable e For lightning protection at the power injector end of the cable consider using a lightning arrestor immediately before the cable enters the building Grounding It is important that the wireless bridge cables and any supporting structures are properly grounded The wireless bridge unit includes a grounding screw for attaching a ground wire Be sure that grounding is available and that it meets local and national electrical codes 3 6 Chapter 4 Hardware Installation Before mounting antennas to set up your wireless bridge links be sure you have selected appropriate locations for each antenna Follow the guidance and information in Chapter 2 Wireless Link Planning Also before mounting units in their intended locations you should first perform initial configuration and test the basic operation of the wireless bridge links in a controlled environment over a very short range See
297. tication Wireless clients can be authenticated for network access by checking their MAC address against the local database configured on the access point or by using a database configured on a central RADIUS server Alternatively authentication can be implemented using the IEEE 802 1X network access control protocol A client s MAC address provides relatively weak user authentication since MAC addresses can be easily captured and used by another station to break into the network Using 802 1X provides more robust user authentication using user names and passwords or digital certificates You can configure the access point to use both MAC address and 802 1X authentication with client station MAC authentication occurring prior to IEEE 802 1X authentication However it is better to choose one or the other as appropriate Take note of the following points before configuring MAC address or 802 1X authentication e Use MAC address authentication for a small network with a limited number of users MAC addresses can be manually configured on the access point itself without the need to set up a RADIUS server but managing a large number of MAC addresses across many access points is very cumbersome A RADIUS server can be used to centrally manage a larger database of user MAC addresses e Use IEEE 802 1X authentication for networks with a larger number of users and where security is the most important issue When using 802 1X authentication a RADIUS
298. to be effective until a DHCP reply is received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway Example SMC AP config interface ethernet Enter Ethernet configuration commands one per line SMC AP if ethernet ip dhcp SMC AP if ethernet Related Commands ip address 7 91 speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex lt auto 10MH 10MF 100MF 100MH gt auto autonegotiate speed and duplex mode e 10MH Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10MF Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 100MH Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100MF Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation Default Setting Auto negotiation is enabled by default Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage If autonegotiation is disabled the speed and duplex mode must be configured to match the setting of the attached device Example The following example configures the Ethernet port to 100 Mbps full duplex operation SMC AP if ethernet speed duplex 100mf SMC AP if ethernet 7 93 7 Command Line Interface shutdown This command disables the Ethernet interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax
299. ts and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Clients can then securely use the local user name and password for access authentication Note that SSH client software needs to be installed on the management station to access the access point for management via the SSH protocol Notes 1 The access point supports only SSH version 2 0 2 After boot up the SSH server needs about two minutes to generate host encryption keys The SSH server is disabled while the keys are being generated SSH Settings O Disable Enable O Disable Enable 22 e SSH Settings Telnet Server Status Enables or disables the Telnet server Default Enabled SSH Server Status Enables or disables the SSH server Default Enabled SSH Server Port Sets the UDP port for the SSH server Range 1 65535 Default 22 6 11 6 System Configuration CLI Commands for SSH To enable the SSH server use the ip ssh server enable command from the CLI Ethernet interface configuration mode To set the SSH server UDP port use the ip ssh server port command To view the current settings use the show system command from the CLI Exec mode not shown in the following example Enterprise AP if ethernet no ip telnet server 7 17 Enterprise AP if ethernet ip ssh server enable 7 16 Enterprise AP if ethernet ip ssh server port 1124 7 16 Enterprise AP if ethernet exit Enterprise AP if ethernet configure Authen
300. ts that the connection to the host has failed it disables the radio interfaces forcing clients to find and associate with another access point When the connection to the host is restored the access point re enables the radio interfaces Table 7 20 Link Integrity Commands Command Function Mode Page ink integrity ping detect Enables link integrity detection GC 7 131 ink integrity ping host Specifies the IP address of a host device in the GC 7 131 wired network ink integrity ping interval Specifies the time between each Ping sentto the GC 7 132 link host ink integrity ping fail retry Specifies the number of consecutive failed Ping GC 7 132 counts before the link is determined as lost ink integrity ethernet detect Enables integrity check for Ethernet link GC 7 132 show link integrity Displays the current link integrity configuration Exec 7 133 7 130 Link Integrity Commands 7 link integrity ping detect This command enables link integrity detection Use the no form to disable link integrity detection Syntax no link integrity ping detect Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e When link integrity is enabled the IP address of a host device in the wired network must be specified The access point periodically sends an ICMP echo request Ping packet to the link host IP address When the number of failed responses either the hos
301. tting 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The management VLAN is for managing the access point For example the access point allows traffic that is tagged with the specified VLAN to manage the access point via remote management SSH SNMP Telnet etc Example SMC AP config management vlanid 3 SMC AP config Related Commands vlan 7 135 vlan id This command configures the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface Syntax vlan id lt vian id gt vlan id Native VLAN ID Range 1 4094 7 136 WMM Commands 7 Default Setting 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless VAP Command Usage To implement the default VLAN ID setting for VAP interface the access point must enable VLAN support using the vlan command e When VLANs are enabled the access point tags frames received from wireless clients with the default VLAN ID for the VAP interface If IEEE 802 1X is being used to authenticate wireless clients specific VLAN IDs can be configured on the RADIUS server to be assigned to each client Using IEEE 802 1X and a central RADIUS server up to 64 VLAN IDs can be mapped to specific wireless clients e If the VLAN ID has not been configured for a client on the RADIUS server then the frames are tagged with the default VLAN ID of the VAP interface Example SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 vlan id 3 SMC AP if wireless g VAP 0 WMM Commands The access point implements QoS usin
302. umber in the URL in this format https device port_number Example SMC AP config ip https port 1234 SMC AP config ip https server Use this command to enable the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the access point s Web interface Use the no form to disable this function 7 19 7 Command Line Interface Syntax ip https server no ip https server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently e If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL https device port_number e When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x Example SMC AP config ip https server SMC AP config web redirect Use this command to enable web based authentication of clients Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no web redirect Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command U
303. urn Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start Informational Informational messages only Debug Debugging messages Example SMC AP config logging level alert SMC AP config logging facility type This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Syntax logging facility type lt type gt type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 16 Command Mode Global Configuration 7 32 System Logging Commands 7 Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the access point However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example SMC AP config logging facility 19 SMC AP config logging clear This command clears all log messages stored in the access point s memory Syntax logging clear Command Mode Global Configuration Example SMC AP config logging clear SMC AP config show logging This command displays the logging configuration Syntax show logging Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show logging Logging Information Syslog State Enabled Logging Console State Enabled Logging Level Alert Logging Facility Type 16 Server
304. uthenticate SMC AP if wireless g 7 117 7 Command Line Interface rogue ap duration This command sets the scan duration for detecting access points Syntax rogue ap duration lt milliseconds gt milliseconds The duration of the scan Range 100 1000 milliseconds Default Setting 350 milliseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage During a scan client access may be disrupted and new clients may not be able to associate to the access point If clients experience severe disruption reduce the scan duration time Along scan duration time will detect more access points in the area but causes more disruption to client access Example SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap duration 200 SMC AP if wireless g Related Commands rogue ap interval 7 118 rogue ap interval This command sets the interval at which to scan for access points Syntax rogue ap interval lt minutes gt minutes The interval between consecutive scans Range 30 10080 minutes Default Setting 720 minutes Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage This command sets the interval at which scans occur Frequent scanning will more readily detect other access points but will cause more disruption to client access 7 118 Rogue AP Detection Commands 7 Example SMC AP if wireless g rogue ap interval 120 SMC AP if wireless g Related Commands rogue ap durati
305. v GroupName RWPriv SecurityModel USM SecurityLevel AuthPriv SMC AP SMC AP show snmp groups show snmp users This command displays the SNMP v3 users and settings Syntax show snmp users Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show snmp users UserName chris GroupName RWPriv AuthType MD5 Passphrase RRR KKK KKK PrivType DES Passphrase KKK KKK RK ARK show snmp group assignments This command displays the SNMP v3 user group assignments Syntax show snmp group assignments Command Mode Exec 7 52 SMC AP SNMP Commands 7 Example SMC AP show snmp group assignments GroupName RWPriv UserName chris SMC AP SMC AP show snmp target This command displays the SNMP v3 notification target settings Syntax show snmp target Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show snmp target Host ID mytraps User z chris IP Address 3 192 168 1 33 UDP Port 162 SMC AP show snmp filter This command displays the SNMP v3 notification filter settings Syntax show snmp filter filter id filter id A user defined name that identifies an SNMP v3 notification filter Maximum length 32 characters Command Mode Exec Example SMC AP show snmp filter Filter trapfilter Type include Subtree iso 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 Type exclude S btree 180 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 23 SMC AP 7 53 7 Command Line Interface show snmp filter assignments Th
306. vice set provided by one or more access points The SSID can be manually configured by the clients can be detected in an access point s beacon or can be obtained by querying for the identity of the nearest access point For clients that do not need to roam set the SSID for the wireless card to that used by the access point to which you want to connect A wireless infrastructure can also support roaming for mobile workers More than one access point can be configured to create an Extended Service Set ESS By placing the access points so that a continuous coverage area is created wireless users within this ESS can roam freely All wireless network card adapters and wireless access points within a specific ESS must be configured with the same SSID Seamless Roaming Between Access Points N ta x Server q g ri al Desktop NAI Switch E be pa N N Access Point gt NS z Notebook PC x Notebook PC gt A Access Point Fa lt BSS 2 gt PR s i eo Rete aoe E ij are I lt BSS 1 gt lt ESS gt Yy Desktop PC tnp a a tt 2 3 2 Network Configuration Bridge Link Topologies The IEEE 802 11 standard defines a Wlreless Distribution System WDS for bridge connections between BSS areas access points The outdoor wireless bridge uses WDS to forward traffic on links between units Up to 5 WDS links can be specified for a S
307. wn WDS Bridge 802 11a Interface OaP Bridge ORepeater ORoot Bridge 00 00 00 00 00 00 Master OSlave OEnable Disable 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ou WH 802 11g Interface Bridge Role ap OBridge ORrepeater ORoot Sridge WDS Bridge Up to six WDS bridge or repeater links MAC addresses per radio interface can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network One unit only must be configured as the root bridge in the wireless network The root bridge is the unit connected to the main core of the wired LAN Other bridges need to specify one Parent link to the root bridge or to a bridge connected to the root bridge The other five WDS links are available as Child links to other bridges Bridge Role Each radio interface can be set to operate in one of the following four modes Default AP AP Access Point Operates as an access point for wireless clients providing connectivity to a wired LAN 6 21 6 System Configuration Bridge Operates as a bridge to other access points The Parent link to the root bridge must be configured Up to five other Child links are available to other bridges e Repeater Operates as a wireless repeater extending the range for remote wireless clients and connecting them to the root bridge The Parent link to the root bridge must be configured In this mod
308. y between the two buidings is a small tree covered hill From the above table it can be seen that for a three mile link the object clearance required at the mid point is 5 3 m 17 4 ft The tree tops on the hill are at an elevation of 17 m 56 ft so the antennas at each end of the link need to be at least 22 3 m 73 ft high Building A is six stories high or 20 m 66 ft so a 2 3 m 3 3 3 Bridge Link Planning 7 5 ft mast or pole must be contructed on its roof to achieve the required antenna height Building B is only three stories high or 9 m 30 ft but is located at an elevation that is 12 m 39 ft higher than bulding A To mount an anntena at the required height on building B a mast or pole of only 1 3 m 4 3 ft is needed Warning Never construct a radio mast pole or tower near overhead power lines Note Local regulations may limit or prevent construction of a high radio mast or tower If your wireless bridge link requires a high radio mast or tower consult a professional contractor for advice Antenna Position and Orientation Once the required antenna height has been determined other factors affecting the precise position of the wireless bridge must be considered Be sure there are no other radio antennas within 2 m 6 ft of the wireless bridge e Place the wireless bridge away from power and telephone lines e Avoid placing the wireless bridge too close to any metallic refective surfaces such as roof installed
309. y one link to the master Default Setting SMC2890W AG Slave SMC2891W AG Master Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Example SMC AP if wireless a bridge mode master SMC AP if wireless a bridge role WDS This command selects the bridge operation mode for the radio interface Syntax bridge role lt ap repeater bridge root bridge gt ap Operates only as an access point for wireless clients repeater Operates as a wireless repeater extending the range for remote wireless clients and connecting them to the root bridge The Parent link to the root bridge must be configured In this mode traffic is not forwarded to the Ethernet port from the radio interface bridge Operates as a bridge to other access points also in bridge mode root bridge Operates as the root bridge in the wireless bridge network Default Setting AP Command Mode Interface Configuration Wireless Command Usage e When the bridge role is set to repeater the Parent link to the root bridge must be configured see bridge link parent on page 77 80 When the access point is operating in this mode traffic is not forwarded to the Ethernet port from the radio interface e Up to four WDS bridge links MAC addresses per radio interface can be specified for each unit in the wireless bridge network One unit only must be 7 19 7 Command Line Interface configured as the root bridge

SMC EliteConnect Wireless Bridge

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents